2012 pathfinder owner's manual

®

2012 PATHFINDEROWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2012 N

ISS

AN

PA

TH

FIN

DE

RR

51

-D

R51-D

Printing : August 2011 (18)

Publication No.: OM1E 0R51U0

Printed in U.S.A.

OM2E 0R51U0

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

In addition to factory installed options, your ve-hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-cessories installed by NISSAN or by yourNISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is importantthat you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

warnings, cautions and instructions concerningproper use of such accessories prior to operatingthe vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSANdealer for details concerning the particular ac-cessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read thisOwner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-iarity with controls and maintenance require-ments, assisting you in the safe operation of yourvehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS give your full attention to drivingand avoid using vehicle features or takingother actions that could distract you.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Pre-teenchildren should be seated in the rear seat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

For descriptions specified for four-wheel drivemodels, a mark is placed at the begin-ning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features foroff-road use, failure to operate four-wheeldrive models correctly may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident. Be sure to read“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV-ING

This vehicle will handle and maneuverdifferently from an ordinary passengercar because it has a higher center ofgravity for off-road use. As with othervehicles with features of this type, fail-ure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or an accident.

Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-ing collision and rollover”, and “Drivingsafety precautions”, in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect itsperformance, safety or durability, andmay even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting from modi-fications may not be covered underNISSAN warranties.

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-ies, may contain perchlorate material. Thefollowing advisory is provided: “PerchlorateMaterial – special handling may apply, Seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.and licensed toXanavi InformaticsCorporation.

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.and licensed toVisteon.

Gracenote� is a regis-tered trademark ofGracenote, Inc. TheGracenote logo andlogo type, and the“Powered byGracenote” logo aretrademarks ofGracenote.

APD1005

XM Radio� requiressubscription, soldseparately. Not avail-able in Alaska, Hawaiior Guam. For moreinformation, visitwww.xmradio.com.

© 2011 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES . . .Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments orquestions, please contact the NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs Department using our toll-freenumber:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

For U.S. [email protected]

For Canadian [email protected]

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

1. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-19)2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-46)3. Front seat belts (P. 1-19)4. Head restraints (P.1-7 )5. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P.1-46)6. Seats (P. 1-2)7. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P.1-53)8. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-59)9. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-46)10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P. 1-30)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0145

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-23)2. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-26)3. Windshield (P. 8-22)4. Power windows (P. 2-45)5. Door locks, keyfob, keys, NISSAN

Intelligent Key ™ (if so equipped)(P. 3-5, 3-2, 3-2, 3-2)

6. Mirrors (P. 3-29)7. Tire pressure (P. 9-12)8. Flat tire (P. 6-2)9. Tire chains (P. 8-43)10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-34)11. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-28)12. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-32)13. Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P. 6-13)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0048

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Roof rack (P. 2-44)2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-13)3. Glass hatch (P. 3-24)4. Rear window wiper and washer switch

(P.2-27)5. NISSAN Intelligent Key ™

(if so equipped) (P. 3-2)6. Glass hatch release (P.3-24)7. Lift gate release switch (P. 3-23)8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-34)9. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-25, P. 9-4)10. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)11. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-7)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0124

EXTERIOR REAR


1. DVD entertainment system(if so equipped) (P. 4-89)

2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-48)3. Map lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-51)4. Sun visors (P. 3-28)5. HomeLink� universal transceiver

(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)6. Glove box (P. 2-39)7. Front seats (P. 1-2)8. 2nd row seats (P.1-16)9. 3rd row seats (P. 1-18)10. Cargo area storage (P. 2-42)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0050

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


1. Ventilators (P. 4-37)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-28)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped) (P. 4-86)4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-46, P. 2-33)5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-3, 2-13)6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-20)7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-26, P. 2-27)

8. Navigation system* (if so equipped)9. Navigation system* controls

(if so equipped)10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-46)11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-39)12. Power outlet (P. 2-36)13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-34)14. Shift selector (P. 5-14)15. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch (P. 2-35)WIC1490

INSTRUMENT PANEL


16. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)(P. 5-23)

17. Storage (P. 2-37)18. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-55)19. Climate controls (P. 4-38, 4-45)20. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)21. Ignition switch (P. 5-10)22. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-27)23. Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-35)24. Pedal position adjustment switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-27)25. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-31)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.


VQ40DE engine

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir(P. 8-15)

2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-25)3. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-25)4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)7. Air cleaner (P. 8-20)8. Drive belt location (P.8-18)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)11. Battery (P. 8-16)12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WDI0633

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


VK56DE engine

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir(P. 8-15)

2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-25)3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)6. Air cleaner (P. 8-20)7. Drive belt location (P. 8-18)8. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)9. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)10. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-25)11. Battery (P. 8-16)12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WDI0627


Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock Braking Sys-tem (ABS) warninglight

2-14

Automatic transmis-sion check warninglight

2-14

Automatic transmis-sion oil temperaturewarning light

2-14

Automatic transmis-sion park warning light( model)

2-14

or

Brake warning light 2-15

Warninglight

Name Page

Charge warning light 2-16

Door open warninglight

2-16

Engine oil pressurewarning light

2-16

4WD warning light( model)

2-16

Low fuel warning light 2-17

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-17

Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight

2-18

NISSAN IntelligentKey ™ warning light (ifso equipped)

2-18

Warninglight

Name Page

Seat belt warning lightand chime

2-19

Shift P warning light 2-19

Supplemental air bagwarning light

2-19

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Automatic transmis-sion position indicatorlight

2-19

Cruise main switchindicator light

2-19

Cruise set switch indi-cator light

2-20

4WD shift indicatorlight ( model)

2-20

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS


Indicatorlight

Name Page

Front passenger airbag status light

2-20

High beam indicatorlight (Blue)

2-20

Malfunction indicatorlight (MIL)

2-20

Overdrive off indicatorlight (if so equipped)

2-21

Security indicator light 2-21

Slip indicator light 2-21

Transfer 4LO positionindicator light( model)

2-21

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

2-22

Vehicle dynamic con-trol (VDC) OFF indica-tor light

2-22


MEMO


1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front power seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Armrest (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Head restraints (1st row only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Head restraints(2nd row – outboard positions only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Adjustable headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30Rear-facing child restraint installation usingLATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Rear-facing child restraint installation usingthe seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35Forward-facing child restraint installationusing LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37Forward-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39Installing top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61

WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat properly. See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” later in thissection.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

● The seatback should not be reclinedany more than needed for comfort. Seatbelts are most effective when the pas-senger sits well back and straight up inthe seat. If the seatback is reclined, therisk of sliding under the lap belt andbeing injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, besure not to contact any moving parts toavoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slide theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)position.

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height ofthe seat cushion to the desired position.

WRS0175 WRS0176 WRS0131

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever up or downto adjust the seat lumbar area.

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT(if so equipped)

Operating tips

● The power seat motor has an auto-resetoverload protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 seconds,then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for along period of time when the engine is off.This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner” in “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” for automatic drive po-sitioner operation.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slidethe seat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

Reclining

Move the recline switch backward until the de-sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatbackforward again, move the switch forward andmove your body forward. The seatback will moveforward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seat

WRS0389 WRS0163


belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the shift selector is in P (Park).

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)Push the front or rear end of the switch up ordown to adjust the angle and height of the seatcushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever up or downto adjust the seat lumbar area.

WRS0164 WRS0389


2ND ROW BENCH SEATADJUSTMENT

RecliningTo recline the outboard seatbacks, pull up on thelever and lean back.

To recline the center seat, pull up on the straplocated on the lower right-hand portion of theseatback and lean back.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat-back for occupants of different sizes for addedcomfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit.See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this

section. Also, the seatback can be reclined toallow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the transmission is in P (Park).

WARNING

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.


● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat and adjust the seat belt properly.See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later in this section.

Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd rowThe outboard seating positions on the 2nd rowbench seat can be tipped forward for easy entryor exit from the 3rd row bench seat. To enter the3rd row �1 , lift up on the seatback latch locatedon the upper corner of the seatback on the 2ndrow bench seat and fold the seatback forward atan angle over the seat base. This will release theback of the seat so it may be tipped forward.

Outboard seatsLRS2088 WRS0469


Then �2 lift up on the lower corner of the seatbase and tip the outboard seating position of the2nd row bench seat forward. To exit the 3rd rowbench seat, lift up on the same seatback latchand fold the seatback forward onto the seat base.Then lift up on the seat base and tip it forward.

WARNING

When returning the seatbacks to the up-right position, be certain they are com-pletely secured in the latched position. Ifthey are not completely secured, passen-gers may be injured in an accident orsudden stop.

ARMREST (if so equipped)

To use the center armrest on the 2nd row benchseat, pull on the tab in the center of the seat andfold it down to the resting position.

HEAD RESTRAINTS (1st row only)

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other ve-hicle safety systems. They may provideadditional protection against injury in cer-tain rear end collisions. Adjust the headrestraints properly, as specified in thissection. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat. Do not attachanything to the head restraint stalks orremove the head restraint. Do not use theseat if the head restraint has been re-moved. If the head restraint was removed,reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seat-ing position. Failure to follow these in-structions can reduce the effectiveness ofthe head restraints. This may increase therisk of serious injury or death in acollision.

LRS0331 LRS2089


The illustration shows the seating positionsequipped with head restraints. The first row headrestraints are adjustable.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped witha head restraint.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped withan adjustable headrest.

Components1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

AdjustmentAdjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of the seat occupant’s ears.

LRS2077 LRS0887 WRS0134


To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and pushthe head restraint down.

RemovalUse the following procedure to remove the ad-justable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highestposition.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly so it is notloose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seatingposition.

LRS0888 LRS0889 LRS0890


Install1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes

in the seat. Make sure the head restraint isfacing the correct direction. The stalk withthe adjustment notches �1 must be installedin the hole with the lock knob �2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push thehead restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before anoccupant uses the seating position.

Front-seat Active Head Restraints

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-ing the force that the seatback receives from theoccupant in a rear-end collision. The movementof the head restraint helps support the occu-pant’s head by reducing its backward movementand helping absorb some of the forces that maylead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisionsat low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original position.

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly asdescribed in this section.

HEAD RESTRAINTS (2nd row –outboard positions only)

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other ve-hicle safety systems. They may provideadditional protection against injury in cer-tain rear end collisions. Adjust the headrestraints properly, as specified in thissection. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat. Do not attachanything to the head restraint stalks orremove the head restraint. Do not use theseat if the head restraint has been re-moved. If the head restraint was removed,reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seat-ing position. Failure to follow these in-structions can reduce the effectiveness ofthe head restraints. This may increase therisk of serious injury or death in acollision.

LRS0891 SPA1025


The illustration shows the seating positionsequipped with head restraints. The second rowhead restraints are removable but not adjustable.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped witha head restraint.


Components1. Head restraint

2. Lock knob(s)

3. Stalks

RemovalUse the following procedure to remove the headrestraints.

1. Adjust the seat or seatback as necessary.

2. Push and hold the lock knob(s).

3. Pull the head restraint up until it is removedfrom the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly so it is notloose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall the head restraint and properly ad-just the seat or seatback before an occupantuses the seating position.

LRS2077 LRS2073 LRS2074


Install

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holesin the seat. Make sure the head restraint isfacing the correct direction.

2. Push the head restraint down until it locks inplace.

ADJUSTABLE HEADREST

WARNING

The adjustable headrests supplement theother vehicle safety systems. They mayprovide additional protection against in-jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustthe headrests properly, as specified in thissection. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat. Do not attachanything to the adjustable headrest stalksor remove the adjustable headrests. Donot use the seat if the adjustable head-rests have been removed. If the headrestwas removed, reinstall and properly adjustthe headrest before an occupant uses theseating position. Failure to follow theseinstructions can reduce the effectivenessof the adjustable headrests. This may in-crease the risk of serious injury or death ina collision.

The illustration shows the seating positionsequipped with adjustable headrests. All of theheadrests are adjustable.


LRS2075 LRS2076


Components1. Adjustable headrest

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

AdjustmentAdjust the headrest so the center is level with thecenter of the seat occupant’s ears.

To raise the headrest, pull it up.LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888


To lower, push and hold the lock knob and pushthe headrest down.

RemovalUse the following procedure to remove the ad-justable headrests.

1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the headrest from the seat.

4. Store the headrest properly so it is not loosein the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrestbefore an occupant uses the seating posi-tion.

Install1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in

the seat. Make sure the headrest is facingthe correct direction. The stalk with the ad-justment notches �1 must be installed in thehole with the lock knob �2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push theheadrest down.

3. Properly adjust the headrest before an oc-cupant uses the seating position.

LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891


FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seats when they arein the fold-down position. In a collision,people riding in these areas withoutproper restraints are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts. Be sure everyonein your vehicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly.

● Do not fold down the rear seats whenoccupants are in the rear seat area orany luggage is on the rear seats.

● Head restraints should be adjustedproperly as they may provide significantprotection against injury in an accident.Always replace and adjust them prop-erly if they have been removed for anyreason.

● If the head restraints are removed forany reason, they should be securelystored to prevent them from causinginjury to passengers or damage to thevehicle in case of sudden braking or anaccident.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seatbacks.In a sudden stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

Folding the front passenger’s seatbackflat (if so equipped)To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat forextra storage length when transporting longitems:

�1 Slide the seat to the rearmost position. Liftup on the recline lever, located on the out-side edge of the seat, and fold the seatbackforward as far as it will go. Then lift up on thelatch located on the upper corner of theseatback to release the back of the seat.

LRS0608


�2 Once the seatback is released, it will enableyou to fold the front passenger seatback flatover the seat cushion.

3. To return the front passenger’s seat to aseating position, lift up on the seatback andpush it up to an upright position. Then pull upon the recline lever and lean the seatback toa proper seating position. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

WARNING

● If you fold the front passenger’s seat-back flat forward to carry longer ob-jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-cured and not near an air bag. In acrash, an inflating air bag might forcethat object toward a person. This couldcause severe injury or even death. Se-cure objects away from the area inwhich an air bag would inflate. See“Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem” later in this section.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the front passenger’s seatwhen it is in the fold-down position. Useof these areas by passengers could re-sult in serious injury in an accident orsudden stop.

Folding the 2nd row bench seatTo fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximumcargo hauling:

�1 Pull the strap forward, located in the centerof each seat cushion, and fold each seatcushion toward the front of the vehicle.

LRS0609 LRS2090


2. Pull the strap to release the head restraintrearward.

�3 Then lift up on the recline lever on the side ofthe outboard seats to fold the outboard seat-backs flat. To fold the center seatback flat,pull up on the strap on the edge of the centerseat cushion and fold the seatback towardthe front of the vehicle.

�4 There is a carpet panel flap on the back ofeach seat that can be folded toward theback of the vehicle.

LRS2063 LRS2099 LRS2068


5. The carpet panel flap provides a level cargofloor when the 3rd row seats are also foldedflat.

6. To return the outboard 2nd row bench seatsto a seating position, reverse the process forthe outboard seats.

7. To return the center seat to a seating posi-tion, lift up on the pull strap on the back ofthe seat base while lifting on the seatback.Then push the seat cushion back into place.Make sure to properly raise the seat-back to an upright position and pushthe seat cushion down into place.

8. Rotate the head restraint forward to return itto the normal seating position.

WARNING

When the seat is returned to the normalseating position, the head restraints mustbe returned to the upright position toproperly protect vehicle occupants.

Folding the 3rd row seatsTo fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargocapacity:

1. Make sure that the head restraints are low-ered.

2. Stow the 3rd row seat belts in the seat belthooks found on the sides of the cargo area.See “Seat belt hook” later in this section.

3. Pull up on the latch located in the uppercorner of each seatback and lower the seat-back forward over the seat base.

LRS2092 LRS0653


To return the 3rd row seats to a seating position,use the pull straps to raise each seatback. Pullback until the seatbacks latch into position.Make sure to properly raise each seatbackto an upright and secured position.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat with both feet on the floor, your chancesof being injured or killed in an accident and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced.NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS


WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016


WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never put the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● No changes should be made to the seatbelt system. For example, do not modifythe seat belt, add material, or installdevices that may change the seat beltrouting or tension. Doing so may affectthe operation of the seat belt system.Modifying or tampering with the seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-vated, it cannot be reused and must bereplaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of preten-sioner system components should bedone by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

SSS0014


PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug andalways position the lap belt as low as possiblearound the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulderbelt over your shoulder and across your chest.Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-dominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.


● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

Manual seat shownWRS0175


�2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock dur-ing a sudden stop or on impact. Aslow pulling motion permits the seatbelt to move and allows you somefreedom of movement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Thensmoothly pull the belt out of the re-tractor.

�3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

�4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seatingpositions three-point seat belts have two modesof operation:

● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modeallows the seat belt to extend and retract to allowthe driver and passengers some freedom ofmovement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat beltwhen the vehicle slows down rapidly or duringcertain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for childrestraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat beltcannot be extended again until the seat belttongue is detached from the buckle and fullyretracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR modeafter the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-straints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During normalseat belt use by an occupant, the ALR modeshould not be activated. If it is activated, itmay cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-sion. It can also change the operation ofthe front passenger air bag. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

WRS0137 WRS0138


WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

�1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows:

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139


Shoulder belt height adjustment (frontand 2nd row outboard seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)To adjust, pull out �1 the adjustment button andmove the shoulder belt anchor �2 to the desiredposition so the belt passes over the center of theshoulder. The belt should be away from your faceand neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Re-lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulderbelt anchor into position.

WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

Seat belt hookWhen the seat belt is not in use and when foldingdown the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts onthe seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERSIf, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender that is compatible withthe installed seat belts is available that can bepurchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in(200 mm) of length and may be used for eitherthe driver or front passenger seating position.See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-chasing an extender if an extender is required.

Front and 2nd row outboard seatsLRS0242 LRS0515


WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply amild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear-facing child restraint

● Forward-facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facingchild restraints. Forward-facing child restraintsare available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.Booster seats are used to help position a vehiclelap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longeruse a forward-facing child restraint.

CHILD SAFETY


WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraintsfor infants and small children. See “Child re-straints” later in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle byusing either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seatbelt. See the “Child restraints” section for moreinformation.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.Studies show that children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat than inthe front seat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”later in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-mends that infants be placed in child restraintsthat comply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child restraintthat fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh atleast 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facingchild restraint as long as possible up to the heightor weight limit of the child restraint. Forward-facing child restraints are available for childrenwho outgrow rear-facing child restraints and areat least 1 year old. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for minimum and maximum weightand height recommendations. NISSAN recom-mends that small children be placed in childrestraints that comply with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose a child

restraint that fits your vehicle and always followthe manufacturer’s instructions for installationand use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided. The seat belt may not fitproperly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used toobtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in acommercially available booster seat if the shoul-der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lapportion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-men. The booster seat should raise the child sothat the shoulder belt is properly positionedacross the top, middle portion of the shoulderand the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seatcan only be used in seating positions that have athree-point type seat belt. The booster seatshould fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-fying that it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. Once the child has grown sothe shoulder belt is no longer on or near the faceand neck, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat.


WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoarea. The child could be seriously injuredor killed in a sudden stop or collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result inserious injury or death of a child orother passengers in a sudden stop orcollision:

– The child restraint must be used andinstalled properly. Always follow allof the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS


– Infants and children should never beheld on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-gest adult cannot resist the forces ofa collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both achild and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all childrestraints be installed in the rearseat. Studies show that children aresafer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat. If youmust install a forward-facing childrestraint in the front seat, see“Forward-facing child restraint in-stallation using the seat belts” laterin this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the frontseat. An inflating air bag could seri-ously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only beused in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraintthat will fit the child and vehicle.Some child restraints may not fitproperly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand loads from childrestraints that are properly fitted.

– Never use the anchor points for adultseat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in the frontpassenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should alwaysbe placed in an appropriate child re-straint while in the vehicle.

● When the child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH systemor a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, loose objects can injure occu-pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle canbecome very hot. Check the seating sur-face and buckles before placing a child inthe child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem. Some child restraints include rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can be con-nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible childrestraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints forinfants and children of various sizes. When se-lecting any child restraint, keep the followingpoints in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.


● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated. Canadian law requires thetop tether strap on forward-facing childrestraints be secured to the designated an-chor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchorsand Tethers for CHildren) system compatiblechild restraints. This system may also be referredto as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.With this system, you do not have to use a vehicleseat belt to secure the child restraint.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-tions for proper use and installation ofchild restraints could result in serious in-jury or death of a child or other passen-gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatiblechild restraints only at the locationsshown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position usingthe LATCH lower anchors. The childrestraint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-ing your fingers into the lower anchorarea. Feel to make sure there are noobstructions over the anchors suchas seat belt webbing or seat cushionmaterial. The child restraint will notbe secured properly if the lower an-chors are obstructed.

LATCH system lower anchor locationsWRS0804


LATCH lower anchor locationThe LATCH lower anchors are located at the rearof the seat cushion near the seatback. A label isattached to the seatback to help you locate theLATCH lower anchors.

Installing child restraint LATCH loweranchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt tosecure the child restraint. Check your child re-straint for a label stating that it is compatible withLATCH. This information may also be in the in-structions provided by the child restraint manu-facturer.

LATCH lower anchor locationWRS0700

LATCH lower anchor point locationsLRS2091

LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLRS0661


When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING

Do not allow cargo to contact the toptether strap when it is attached to the toptether anchor. Properly secure the cargoso it does not contact the top tether strap.Cargo that is not properly secured orcargo that contacts the top tether strapmay damage it during a collision. A childcould be seriously injured or killed in acollision if the top tether strap isdamaged.

1. Top tether straps

2. Anchor points

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located in the following loca-tions:

● 2nd row bench on the floor behind the out-board seating positions as shown.

● 2nd row bench center seatback as shown.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap, consult your NISSANdealer for details.

LATCH rigid-mounted attachmentLRS0662

2nd row bench seatLRS0659


REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING LATCHRefer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCHsystem:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2WRS0802


3. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourhand to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch (25mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the restraint isnot secure, tighten the LATCH attachmentas necessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint or try installing byusing the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 2through 4.

Rear-facing – step 3LRS0673



REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING THE SEATBELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) must be usedwhen installing a child restraint. Failure touse the ALR mode will result in the childrestraint not being properly secured. Therestraint could tip over or be loose andcause injury to a child in a sudden stop orcollision. Also, it can change the opera-tion of the front passenger air bag. See“Front passenger air bag and status light”later in this section.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Childsafety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rearseats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.

WRS0256Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256


2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to theEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Rear-facing – step 2WRS0761




5. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint to compressthe vehicle seat cushion and seatback whilepulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the belt holds the restraint in place.If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You may needto try a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraintmode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGLATCHRefer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraints” sections beforeinstalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint in the 2nd row seats using theLATCH system:





2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Installing top tether strap” in thissection. Do not install child restraints thatrequire the use of a top tether strap in seat-ing positions that do not have a top tetheranchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. Ifthe head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall the headrestraint when the child restraint is re-moved. See “Head restraints” in this sectionfor head restraint adjustment information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2WRS0799

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2WRS0800

Forward-facing – step 4LRS0671


6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch (25mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the restraint isnot secure, tighten the LATCH attachmentas necessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 3through 6.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) must be usedwhen installing a child restraint. Failure touse the ALR mode will result in the childrestraint not being properly secured. Therestraint could tip over or be loose andcause injury to a child in a sudden stop orcollision. Also, it can change the opera-tion of the front passenger air bag. See“Front passenger air bag and status light”later in this section.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat belt in therear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position. Childrestraints for infants must be used inthe rear-facing direction and, there-fore, must not be used in the front seat.

Forward-facing – step 6WRS0697

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –step 1

WRS0699



The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.If the head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall thehead restraint when the child restraintis removed. See “Head restraints” in thissection for head restraint adjustment, re-moval and installation information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint (rear seat installation only). See “In-stalling top tether strap” in this section. Donot install child restraints that require the useof a top tether strap in seating positions thatdo not have a top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts toEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.




5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the belt holds the restraint in place.If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You may needto try a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.





9. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switch inthe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light should illuminate. If thislight is not illuminated see “Front passengerair bag and status light” in this section.Move the child restraint to anotherseating position. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-straint mode) is canceled.

1. Top tether straps2. Anchor points

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAPFirst, secure the child restraint with the LATCHlower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)or the seat belt, as applicable.

1. If necessary, raise or remove the head re-straint to position the top tether strap overthe top of the seatback �1 . If the headrestraint is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the head restraintwhen the child restraint is removed. See“Head restraints” in this section forhead restraint adjustment, removaland installation information.

Forward-facing – step 10WRS0475 LRS0659


2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint �2 on the seat directly behind the childrestraint.

3. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-stallation procedure steps in this sectionbefore tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap, consult your NISSANdealer for details.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not usedproperly, the risk of a child being injuredin a sudden stop or collision greatlyincreases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion ofthe belt is away from the child’s faceand neck and the lap portion of thebelt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not be-hind the child or under the child’s arm.

– A booster seat must only be installedin a seating position that has alap/shoulder belt.

LRS0455 LRS0453


Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if alow back booster seat �1 is chosen, thevehicle seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seatback islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat �2 should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place the child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with thechild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

The instructions in this section apply to boosterseat installation in the rear seats or the frontpassenger seat.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in theAutomatic Locking Retractor mode whenusing a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in therear seat or in the front passenger seat:

LRS0464


1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front-facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. Ifthe head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall thehead restraint when the booster seat isremoved. See “Head restraints” in this sec-tion for head restraint adjustment, removaland installation information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper booster seat fit, try anotherseating position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting theseat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in “Three-point type seat belt withretractor” earlier in this section.

WRS0699Front passenger position

LRS0454


7. If the booster seat is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switch inthe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light may or may not illuminate,depending on the size of the child and thetype of booster seat being used. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMThis Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe following systems:

● Driver and passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air BagSystem)

● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag

● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-over supplemental air bag

● Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front- impact air bag system:The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag system: This system can helpcushion the impact force to the chest area of thedriver and front passenger in certain side impactcollisions. The side air bag is designed to inflateon the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag system: Thissystem can help cushion the impact force to thehead of occupants in front and rear outboardseating positions in certain side-impact or roll-over collisions. In a side impact, the curtain androllover air bags are designed to inflate on theside where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover,both curtain and rollover air bags are designed toinflate and remain inflated for a short time.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the seat belts and are not a substitutefor them. Seat belts should always be correctlyworn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-tance away from the steering wheel, instrumentpanel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlierin this section for instructions and precautions onseat belt usage.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

WRS0475

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM


WARNING

● The front air bags ordinarily will notinflate in the event of a side impact, rearimpact, rollover, or lower severity fron-tal collision. Always wear your seatbelts to help reduce the risk or severityof injury in various kinds of accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in thissection.

● The seat belts and the front air bags aremost effective when you are sitting wellback and upright in the seat. The frontair bags inflate with great force. Evenwith the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, if you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of posi-tion in any way, you are at greater risk ofinjury or death in a crash. You may alsoreceive serious or fatal injuries from thefront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back againstthe seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. TheAdvanced Air Bag System monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags asneeded. Failure to properly wear seatbelts can increase the risk or severity ofinjury in an accident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the seat belt can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent. See “Front passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when the frontair bag inflates.

WRS0031


WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041


WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain and rollover air bagsinflate if they are not properly re-strained. Pre-teens and children shouldbe properly restrained in the rear seat, ifpossible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044


WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating front air bag could seriously in-jure or kill your child. See “Child re-straints” earlier in this section fordetails.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bags and roof-mounted curtainside-impact and rollover supplemental airbags:

● The side air bags and curtain and roll-over air bags ordinarily will not inflate inthe event of a frontal impact, rear im-pact, or lower severity side collision.Always wear your seat belts to helpreduce the risk or severity of injury invarious kinds of accidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256Do not lean against doors or windows.

WRS0431


WARNING

● The seat belts, the side air bags andcurtain and rollover air bags are mosteffective when you are sitting well backand upright in the seat. The side air bagand curtain and rollover air bag inflatewith great force. Do not allow anyone toplace their hand, leg or face near theside air bag on the side of the seatbackof the front seat or near the side roofrails. Do not allow anyone sitting in thefront seats or rear outboard seats toextend their hand out of the window orlean against the door. Some examplesof dangerous riding positions areshown in the previous illustrations.

Do not lean against doors or windows.WRS0365

Do not lean against doors or windows.SSS0162


WARNING

● When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, donot hold onto the seatback of the frontseat. If the side air bag inflates, you maybe seriously injured. Be especially care-ful with children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere with sideair bag inflation.

WRS0363 SSS0159


1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag inflators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)4. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-

ules5. Crash zone sensor6. Occupant classification system control

unit7. Occupant classification sensor (pres-

sure sensor)8. Satellite sensors9. Seat belt buckle switches10. Seat belt with pretensioner11. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System for the driver and frontpassenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.WRS0474


The driver supplemental front-impact air bag islocated in the center of the steering wheel. Thepassenger supplemental front-impact air bag ismounted in the dashboard above the glove box.The front air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper front air bag system opera-tion.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dualstage inflators. It also monitors information fromthe crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas-sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen-ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation isbased on the severity of a collision and seat beltusage for the driver. For the front passenger, itadditionally monitors the weight of an occupantor object on the seat and seat belt tension. Basedon information from the sensors, only one front airbag may inflate in a crash, depending on thecrash severity and whether the front occupantsare belted or unbelted. Additionally, the frontpassenger air bag may be automatically turnedOFF under some conditions, depending on theweight detected on the passenger seat and howthe seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag

is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will beilluminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light willnot be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See“Front passenger air bag and status light” later inthis section for further details. One front air baginflating does not indicate improper performanceof the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSANdealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contactNISSAN. Contact information is contained in thefront of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noisemay be heard, followed by the release of smoke.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the face andchest of the front occupants. They can help savelives and reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facial abrasionsor other injuries. Front air bags do not providerestraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat beltsshould be correctly worn and the driver and pas-senger seated upright as far as practical awayfrom the steering wheel or instrument panel. Thefront air bags inflate quickly in order to helpprotect the front occupants. Because of this, theforce of the front air bag inflating can increase therisk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or isagainst, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON or START posi-tion.



Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light islocated near the climate controls. After the igni-tion switch is placed in the �ON� position, thefront passenger air bag status light on the instru-ment panel illuminates for about 7 seconds andthen turns off or remains illuminated dependingon the front passenger seat occupied status. Thelight operates as follows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The isOFF and the front passenger air bag is OFFand will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,child or child restraint as outlined in thissection: The illuminates to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is OFF andwill not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec-tion: The light is OFF to indicate thatthe front passenger air bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below inaccordance with U.S. regulations. If the frontpassenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a

crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bagto certain front passenger seat occupants, suchas children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are usedto meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of thefront passenger seat cushion and is designed todetect an occupant and objects on the seat byweight. It works together with seat belt sensorsdescribed later. For example, if a child is in thefront passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem is designed to turn the passenger air bagOFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if achild restraint of the type specified in the regula-tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’sweight can be detected and cause the air bag toturn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-tion can vary depending on the front passengerseat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and theamount of tension on the seat belt, such as whenit is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). Based on theweight on the seat detected by the occupant

WRS0475


classification sensor and the belt tension de-tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air BagSystem determines whether the front passengerair bag should be automatically turned OFF asrequired by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF, however if theoccupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sittingon an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being outof position), this could cause the sensor to turnthe air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupantimproperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode,this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF.Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seatbelt properly for the most effective protection bythe seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate childrestraints and booster seats be properly installedin a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupantclassification sensor and seat belt sensors aredesigned to operate as described above to turnthe front passenger air bag OFF for specifiedchild restraints as required by the regulations.Failing to properly secure child restraints and to

use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip ormove in an accident or sudden stop. This canalso result in the passenger air bag inflating in acrash instead of being OFF. See “Child re-straints” earlier in this section for proper use andinstallation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, thepassenger air bag is designed not to inflate in acrash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object’s weight detected by the occupantclassification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the front pas-senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicatingthat the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the passenger air bag status light may or may not

be illuminated, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint being used. If the airbag status light is not illuminated (indicating thatthe air bag might inflate in a crash), it could bethat the child restraint or seat belt is not beingused properly. Make sure that the child restraint isinstalled properly, the seat belt is used properlyand the occupant is positioned properly. If the airbag status light is not illuminated, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-minate even though you believe that the childrestraint, the seat belts and the occupant areproperly positioned, the system may be sensingan unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag isOFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that thesystem is OFF by using a special tool. However,until you have confirmed with your dealer thatyour air bag is working properly, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag statuslight will take a few seconds to register a changein the passenger seat status. For example, if alarge adult who is sitting in the front passengerseat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bagstatus light will go from OFF to ON for a fewseconds and then to OFF. This is normal systemoperation and does not indicate a malfunction.


If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warninglight , located in the meter and gauges areaof the instrument panel, will blink. Have the sys-tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bagprecautions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the front airbags inflate.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe front air bag system.

● Tampering with the front air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.Tampering includes changes to thesteering wheel and the instrumentpanel assembly by placing materialover the steering wheel pad and abovethe instrument panel or by installingadditional trim material around the airbag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor (pressure sensor).

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thefront air bag system. Tampering withthe seat belt system may result in seri-ous personal injury.

● Work on and around the front air bagsystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. The Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) wiring harnesses* shouldnot be modified or disconnected. Unau-thorized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be used onthe air bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the front air bag systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.


Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of theseatback of the front seats. The curtain and roll-over air bags are located in the side roof rails in all3 rows. These systems are designed to meetvoluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk ofinjury to out-of-position occupants. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed. The side air bags and curtain androllover air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity side collisions, although they may inflateif the forces in another type of collision are similarto those of a higher severity side impact. They aredesigned to inflate on the side where the vehicleis impacted. They may not inflate in certain sidecollisions.

Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed toinflate in certain types of rollover collisions or nearrollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements(for example, during severe off roading) maycause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper side air bag and curtain androllover air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain and rolloverair bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by release of smoke. This smoke is notharmful and does not indicate a fire. Care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritationand choking. Those with a history of a breathingcondition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the chest ofthe front occupants. Curtain and rollover air bagshelp to cushion the impact force to the head ofoccupants in the front and rear outboard seatingpositions in all rows. They can help save lives andreduce serious injuries. However, an inflatingside air bag, or curtain and rollover air bag may

cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bagsand curtain and rollover air bags do not providerestraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the side air bag. Rear seatpassengers should be seated as far away aspractical from the door finishers and side roofrails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover airbags inflate quickly in order to help protect theoccupants. Because of this, the force of the sideair bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflatingcan increase the risk of injury if the occupant istoo close to, or is against, these air bag modulesduring inflation. The side air bag will deflatequickly after the collision is over.

The curtain and rollover air bags will remain in-flated for a short time.

The side air bags and curtain and rolloverair bags operate only when the ignitionswitch is in the ON or START position.


WRS0381


WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if a side air bag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain and rollover air bag systemcomponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain and rolloverair bag systems. This is to prevent dam-age to or accidental inflation of the sideair bag and curtain and rollover air bagsystems.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of thecurtain and rollover air bag systems.

● Tampering with the side air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.For example, do not change the frontseats by placing material near the seat-backs or by installing additional trimmaterial, such as seat covers, aroundthe side air bag.

● Work around and on the side air bagand curtain and rollover air bag systemsshould be done by a NISSAN dealer.Installation of electrical equipmentshould also be done by a NISSANdealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the side air bag or cur-tain and rollover air bag systems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors areyellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the side air bag andcurtain and rollover air bag systems and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’sManual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (Frontseats)

WARNING

● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-ter activation. They must be replacedtogether with the retractor and buckleas a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in acollision but a pretensioner is not acti-vated, be sure to have the pretensionersystem checked and, if necessary, re-placed by your NISSAN dealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pretensioner system. This is to pre-vent damage to or accidental activationof the pretensioners. Tampering withthe pretensioner system may result inserious personal injury.

● Work around and on the pretensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pretensioner system.


● If you need to dispose of a pretensioneror scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSANdealer. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.

Working with the seat belt retractor, the preten-sioner helps tighten the seat belt when the ve-hicle becomes involved in certain types of colli-sions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat beltretractor. These seat belts are used the same wayas conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-leased and a loud noise may be heard. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allowthe seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) toreduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light isused to indicate malfunctions in the pretensionersystem. (See �SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT� in this section for more de-tails.) If the operation of the supplemental air bagwarning light indicates there is a malfunction,have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pretensioner systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels

The warning labels are located on the sur-face of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle asshown in the illustration.

WRS0885


SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHTThe supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten-sioners and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bagand pretensioner systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side airbag, curtain and rollover air bag or pretensionersystems may not operate properly. They must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain and rollover air bagand/or pretensioner systems will not op-erate in an accident. To help avoid injuryto yourself or others, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

Repair and replacement procedureThe front air bags, side air bags, curtain androllover air bags and pretensioners are designedto inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bagwarning light remains illuminated after inflationhas occurred. Repair and replacement of thesesupplemental air bag systems should be doneonly by a NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain androllover air bags, pretensioners and related partsshould be pointed out to the person performingthe maintenance. The ignition switch should al-ways be in the LOCK position when workingunder the hood or inside the vehicle.

LRS0100


WARNING

● Once a front air bag, side air bag, orcurtain and rollover air bag has inflated,the air bag module will not functionagain and must be replaced. Addition-ally, the activated pretensioners mustalso be replaced. The air bag moduleand pretensioner should be replaced bya NISSAN dealer. The air bag moduleand pretensioner cannot be repaired.

● The front air bag, side air bag, curtainand rollover air bag systems and thepretensioner system should be in-spected by a NISSAN dealer if there isany damage to the front end or sideportion of the vehicle.

● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap thevehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor-rect disposal procedures could causepersonal injury.


MEMO


2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-13Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-31Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Storage bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Seat pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Cargo area storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

Interior lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Personal lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51HomeLink� universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-51

Programming HomeLink�. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52Programming HomeLink� for Canadiancustomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Operating the HomeLink� universaltransceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54Reprogramming a single HomeLink� button . . . . . . 2-54If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

1. Ventilators (P. 4-37)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-28)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped) (P. 4-86)4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-46, P. 2-33)5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-3, 2-13)6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-20)7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-26, P. 2-27)

8. Navigation system* (if so equipped)9. Navigation system* controls

(if so equipped)10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-46)11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-39)12. Power outlet (P. 2-36)13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-34)14. Shift selector (P. 5-14)15. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch (P. 2-35)WIC1490

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

16. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)(P. 5-23)

17. Storage (P. 2-37)18. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-55)19. Climate controls (P. 4-38, 4-45)20. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)21. Ignition switch (P. 5-10)22. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-27)23. Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-35)24. Pedal position adjustment switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-27)25. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-31)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

1. Warning/indicator lights2. Tachometer3. Speedometer4. Fuel gauge5. Voltmeter

6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Trip com-puter

7. Engine oil pressure gauge8. Engine coolant temperature gauge

LIC2028

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Speedometer2. Odometer3. Change buttonSPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETERSpeedometerThe speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the change button changes the displayas follows:

Trip → Trip → Distance to Empty →Average speed → Average fuel consumption →Journey time → Trip

For additional information, refer to “Trip com-puter” later in this section.

For vehicles equipped with navigation system,refer to “How to use the INFO button” in the“Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recog-nition systems” section later in this manual.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-ond resets the currently displayed trip odometerto zero.

LIC2029 LIC0781


Loose fuel cap warning messagePress the reset button �A for more than 1 secondto reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-sage after the fuel cap has been tightened. Foradditional information see “Fuel-filler cap” in the“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

Check tire pressure warning messageThe CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warningmessage is displayed when the low tire pressurewarning light is illuminated and low tire pressureis detected. Check and adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressure shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label. TheCHECK TIRE PRES warning message turns offwhen the low tire pressure warning light turns off.

Push the reset button �A for more than 1 secondto turn off the CHECK TIRE PRES warning mes-sage. The low tire pressure warning light remainsilluminated until the tires are inflated to the rec-ommended COLD tire pressure. The CHECKTIRE PRES warning message is displayed eachtime the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition as long as the low tire pressure warninglight remains illuminated. For more informationsee “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “In-struments and controls” section, “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” and “Wheels and tires” section in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thisOwner’s Manual.LRS2004 LIC2017


TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engineinto the red zone �1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-gine speed. Operating the engine in thered zone may cause serious enginedamage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range �1 when the gauge needle pointswithin the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency”section for immediateaction required.

LIC0738 LIC0739


FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after theignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) maycome on. Refuel as soon as possible.After a few driving trips. the lightshould turn off. If the light remains onafter a few driving trips, have the ve-hicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL)” later inthis section.

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-tem oil pressure while the engine is running. Theneedle should be in the middle of the gauge whenthe engine is running.

CAUTION

● This gauge is not designed to indicatelow engine oil level. Use the dipstick tocheck the oil level. (See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.)

LIC0740 LIC0741


● If the gauge needle does not move withthe proper amount of engine oil, havethe vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer. Continued vehicle operation insuch a condition could cause seriousdamage to the engine.

VOLTMETERWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the voltmeter indicates the battery volt-age. When the engine is running, it indicates thegenerator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop belowthe normal range. If the needle is not in the normalrange (11 – 15 volts) �1 while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the charging systemis not functioning properly. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

TRIP COMPUTER

The display of the trip computer is situated in thespeedometer display. When the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position, the display scrolls allthe modes of the trip computer and then showsthe mode chosen before the ignition switch wasplaced in the OFF position.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, modes of the trip computer can beselected by pushing the trip computer changebutton. The following modes can be selected:

Distance to empty (dte—mile or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in thefuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warningfeature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode isautomatically selected and the digits blink in or-der to draw the driver’s attention. Press thechange button if you wish to return to the modethat was selected before the warning occurred.The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until thevehicle is refueled.

WIC1299


When the fuel level drops even lower, the dtedisplay will change to (----).

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while theignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-play just before the ignition switch isturned OFF may continue to be dis-played.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves,the fuel in the tank shifts, which maymomentarily change the display.

Average speed (MPH or km/h)The average speed mode shows the averagevehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is doneby pressing the change button for more thanapproximately 1 second. The display is updatedevery 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after areset, the display shows (----).

Average fuel consumption (Mpg orl/100km)The average fuel consumption mode shows theaverage fuel consumption since the last reset.Resetting is done by pressing the change buttonfor more than approximately 1 second. The dis-play is updated every 30 seconds. At about thefirst 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the displayshows (----).

Journey timeThe journey time mode shows the time since thelast reset. The displayed time can be reset bypressing the change button for more than ap-proximately 1 second.

Trip computer resetPushing the change button for more than 3 sec-onds will reset all modes except Trip A and dis-tance to empty (dte).

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-dicates the heading direction of the vehicle.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the or button as described in thecharts below to activate various features of theautomatic anti-glare rearview mirror.

Type A

Push and hold

thebutton for about:

Feature:(Push button again for about 1 sec-ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 secondsAutomatic anti-glare/indicator lighttoggles on/off

11 secondsCompass zone can be changed tocorrect false compass readings

13 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

Type B

Push and hold

thebutton for about:

Feature:(Push button again for about 1 sec-ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 secondsCompass zone can be changed tocorrect false compass readings

10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)


For information about the automatic anti-glarefeature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-ments” section.

COMPASS DISPLAY

Push the or button for about 1 sec-ond when the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition to toggle the compass direction display�1 on or off. The display will indicate the directionthat the vehicle is heading.

N: NorthE: EastS: SouthW: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass bydriving the vehicle in three complete circles atless than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by drivingyour vehicle on your everyday route. The com-pass will be calibrated once it has tracked threecomplete circles.

Type AWIC0904

Type BLIC0583


Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-graphical north is known as variance. In someareas, this difference can sometimes be greatenough to cause false compass readings. Followthese instructions to set the variance for yourparticular location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for about11 seconds or the button for about 8seconds. The current zone number will ap-pear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the or the button repeat-edly to toggle through the zone numbersuntil the desired number appears in the dis-play. Once you have selected a zone num-ber, the display will show a compass direc-tion within a few seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with automaticcorrection function. If the correct direction is notshown, follow this procedure.WIC0355


1. With the display turned on, press and holdthe button for about 13 seconds orthe for about 10 seconds. The “C” or“CAL” icon in the compass display will illu-minate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehiclein three complete circles at a maximumspeed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the displayshould return to normal.

CAUTION

● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect the op-eration of the compass.

● When cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as it maycause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.


or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light

Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Automatic Transmission check warning light Low windshield-washer fluid warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic transmission oil temperature warninglight

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ warning light (if soequipped)

Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Automatic transmission park warning light( model)

Seat belt warning light and chime Overdrive off indicator light (if so equipped)

or Brake warning light Shift P warning light Security indicator light

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Slip indicator light

Door open warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light Transfer 4LO position indicator light( model)

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

4WD warning light ( model) Cruise set switch indicator light Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF indicatorlight

Low fuel warning light 4WD shift indicator light ( model)

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS


CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand place the ignition switch in the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then gooff:

or , , , , ,

, , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatean open circuit in the electrical system.Have the system repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light illuminates and then turns off. Thisindicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while theengine is running, or while driving, it may indicatethe ABS is not functioning properly. Have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-tion is turned off. The brake system then operatesnormally, but without anti-lock assistance. See“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion.

Automatic Transmission checkwarning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on for about 2 seconds.If the light comes on at any other time, it mayindicate the automatic transmission system is notfunctioning properly. Have the system checkedby a NISSAN dealer.

Automatic transmission oiltemperature warning light

This light comes on when the automatic transmis-sion oil temperature is too high. If the light comeson while driving, reduce the vehicle speed assoon as safely possible until the light turns off.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation when the A/Toil temperature warning light is on maydamage the automatic transmission.

Automatic transmission parkwarning light ( model)

WARNING

● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates thatthe automatic transmission P (Park) po-sition will not function and the transfercase is in neutral.

● When parking, always make sure thatthe 4WD shift indicator light illuminatesand the parking brake is set. Failure toengage the transfer position in 2WD,AUTO, 4H or 4LO could result in thevehicle moving unexpectedly, resultingin serious personal injury or propertydamage.


● Part time 4WD: Shift the 4WD switchinto the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position againto turn off the ATP warning light whenthe shift selector is in the P position andthe ATP warning light is ON. (Beforeshifting the 4WD switch into the 4LOposition, move the shift selector intothe N position once, shift the shift se-lector into P again and make sure theATP warning light is OFF.)

● All mode 4WD: The warning light maycome on when the ignition switch is ONand the shift selector is shifted to the Pposition while shifting the transfer casebetween 4H and 4LO. Shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD, AUTO, 4H, or4LO position again to turn off the ATPwarning light when the warning lightcomes on. (Before shifting the 4WDswitch into the 4LO position or out of4LO in the 4H position, move the shiftselector into the N position.) Shift theshift selector into the P position andmake sure that the 4WD shift indicatorlight is ON and the ATP warning light isOFF.)

This light indicates that the automatic transmis-sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-fer control is not secured in any drive position

while the shift selector is in the P (Park) position,the transmission will disengage and the drivewheels will not lock.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on when the parkingbrake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.If the light comes on while the engine is runningwith the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by a NISSANdealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warningindicator

When the parking brake is released and thebrake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brakewarning light and the Anti-lock Braking System(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate theABS is not functioning properly. Have the brakesystem checked, and if necessary, repaired by aNISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-ing and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS) warning light” in this section.)


Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

● Do not ground electrical accessoriesdirectly to the battery terminal. Doingso will bypass the variable control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely. Refer to “Variablevoltage control system” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section laterin this manual.

● Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are notclosed securely while the ignition switch is in theON position.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If thelight flickers or comes on during normal driving,pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engineimmediately and call a NISSAN dealer or otherauthorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use thedipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

4WD warning light( model)

The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni-tion switch is placed in the ON position. It turnsoff soon after the engine is started.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,the warning light will either remain illuminated orblink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Startingand driving” section.

CAUTION

● If the warning light comes on or blinksduring operation, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WDwarning light turns on when you aredriving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the4WD shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WDvehicles, stop the vehicle and shiftthe shift selector to the N positionwith the brake pedal depressed andshift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for part time 4WDvehicles, stop the vehicle and shiftthe shift selector to the N positionwith the brake pedal depressed andshift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.


● If the warning light is still on after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fueltank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuelin the tank when the fuel gauge needlereaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tirepressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of lowtire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notfunctioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light illuminates for about 1 secondand turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illuminate.A CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warningmessage is also displayed in the odometer.If you select the tire pressure informationin the display (if so equipped), the LOWPRESSURE warning message will be dis-played. The tire pressure for each tire willalso be displayed.

When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjust thetire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening. The low tirepressure warning light does not automati-cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-ommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the lowtire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-sure gauge to check the tire pressure.

Press the reset button for more than 1 second toturn off the CHECK TIRE PRES warning mes-sage. The low tire pressure warning light remainsilluminated until the tires are inflated to the rec-ommended cold tire pressure. The CHECK TIRE

PRES warning message is displayed each timethe ignition switch is turned on as long as the lowtire pressure warning light remains illuminated.

For additional information, see “Check tire pres-sure warning message” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section and “Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving”section and in the “In case of emergency” sec-tion.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the lowtire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute when the ignition switch isturned ON. The light will remain on after the 1minute. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning mes-sage is not displayed if the low tire pressurewarning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal-function. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

For additional information, see “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section.


WARNING

● If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch placed in the ON posi-tion, have the vehicle checked by aNISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

● If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could re-sult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening to turn thelow tire pressure warning light OFF. Ifthe light still illuminates while drivingafter adjusting the tire pressure, a tiremay be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

● The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield-washer fluidwarning light

This light comes on when the windshield-washerfluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid

as necessary. See “Windshield-washer fluid” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™warning light (if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key warning light illuminates greenwhen the ignition switch can be turned. TheIntelligent Key warning light illuminates red whenthe ignition switch cannot be turned.

The Intelligent Key warning light blinks red if theIntelligent Key is taken outside of the vehiclewhile the ignition switch is placed in the ACC orON position.

● If the Intelligent Key warning light blinks,make sure of the location of the IntelligentKey as soon as possible. The Intelligent Keyshould be carried by the driver while operat-ing the vehicle.

● The Intelligent Key warning light turns offabout 10 seconds after the Intelligent Key isbrought inside the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key warning light blinks greenindicating that the Intelligent Key battery is almostdischarged.

See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.


Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition switch is placed in the ON or STARTposition and remains illuminated until the driver’sseat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chimesounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’sseat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position, the system does not activate thewarning light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.

Shift P warning light

This light blinks red and the key reminder chimesounds if the shift selector is in any position otherthan P (Park) and the ignition switch is in the OFFposition. Return the shift selector to P (Park) withthe ignition switch in the OFF position and thelight will turn off. Place the ignition switch in theLOCK position and the chime will turn off.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-sioner systems need servicing and your vehiclemust be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-tensioners may not function properly. For addi-tional details see “Supplemental restraint sys-tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain and roll-over air bagsystems and/or pretensioner systems willnot operate in an accident. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have your ve-hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soonas possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmissionposition indicator light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this indicator light shows the shift selec-tor position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicatorlight

The light comes on when the cruise control mainswitch is pushed. The light goes out when themain switch is pushed again. When the cruisemain switch indicator light comes on, the cruisecontrol system is operational.


Cruise set switch indicatorlight

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If the lightblinks while the engine is running, it may indicatethe cruise control system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

4WD shift indicator light( model)

The light should turn off within 1 second afterplacing the ignition switch in the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-cator light will illuminate the position selected bythe 4WD shift switch.

The 4WD shift indicator light may blinkwhile shifting from one drive mode to theother.

Front passenger air bag statuslight

The front passenger air bag status light ( )will be lit and the passenger front air bag will beOFF depending on how the front passenger seatis being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may also comeon steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to makesure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closedtightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds whenthe engine is not running, it indicates that thevehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

Operation

The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel-filler cap ifthe LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message isdisplayed in the odometer. If the fuel-fillercap is loose or missing, tighten or install thecap and continue to drive the vehicle.The light should turn off after a fewdriving trips. If the light does not turnoff after a few driving trips, have the vehicleinspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed to thedealer.


● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — Anengine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspectedby a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Overdrive off indicator light (ifso equipped)

This light comes on when the overdrive functionis OFF.

The automatic transmission overdrive function iscontrolled by the overdrive switch.

For additional information, see “Driving the ve-hicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignition switch isplaced in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. Thisfunction indicates the security system equippedon the vehicle is operational.

For additional information, see “Security sys-tems” later in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC system orthe traction control system is operating, thusalerting that the vehicle is nearing its tractionlimits. The road surface may be slippery.

Transfer 4LO position indicatorlight ( model)

The light should turn off within 1 second afterplacing the ignition switch in the ON position.

This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch isset in the 4LO position with the ignition key in theON position.

The transfer case may be damaged if you shift theswitch while driving.

Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicatorlight turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switchto 4LO.

The indicator light may blink while shiftingfrom one drive mode to the other.

All mode 4WD (if so equipped)

If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO positionand the light blinks, stop the vehicle, drive slowlyforward and the light will turn on.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop thevehicle and shift the transmission shift selector tothe N position with the brake pedal depressed,then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to4LO or 4H.


You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switchbetween 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicleand shift the shift selector to the N position withthe brake pedal depressed.

Part time 4WD (if so equipped)

The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking andremain illuminated or turn off before shifting thetransmission into gear. If the shift selector isshifted from the N position to any other gearwhen the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the ve-hicle may move unexpectedly.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop thevehicle and shift the transmission shift selector tothe N position with the brake pedal depressed,then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to4LO or 4H.

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switchbetween 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicleand shift the shift selector to the N position withthe brake pedal depressed.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VehicleDynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF, thetransfer case is in the 4LO position (model), or when the Vehicle Dynamic Controlsystem is not functioning properly. This indicatesthe Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not oper-ating.

Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switchagain or restart the engine and the system willoperate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes onwhen you place the ignition switch in the ONposition. The light will turn off after about 2 sec-onds if the system is operational. If the light stayson or comes on along with the SLIP indicator lightwhile you are driving, have the Vehicle DynamicControl system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the Ve-hicle Dynamic Control system is disabled and theVDC indicator light will not turn off after 2 sec-onds when the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition. To reset the system, you must performthe reset procedure. Refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section of this manual.

If the light does not go off after performing thereset procedure, have the traction control systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system isoperating, you might feel slight vibration or hearthe system working when starting the vehicle oraccelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a disc brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.


Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door isopened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ buzzer (if soequipped)The Intelligent Key buzzer sounds if any one of thefollowing improper operations is found.

● The ignition switch is not returned to theLOCK position when closing the doors.

● The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehiclewhen locking the doors.

● The Intelligent Key is taken outside the ve-hicle when operating the vehicle.

When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check boththe vehicle and the Intelligent Key. See “NISSANIntelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving checks andadjustments” section.

Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

● Vehicle security system

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorswhen the system is armed. It is not, however, amotion detection type system that activates whena vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior orexterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-ways secure your vehicle even if parking for abrief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Beaware of your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows and the glass hatch. (Thesystem can be armed even if the win-dows are open. However, the glasshatch must be closed.)

2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key.

WIC0841

SECURITY SYSTEMS


3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doorscan be locked with:

● the power door lock switch (if the door isopened, locked and then closed).

● the key — master or mechanical (Intelli-gent Key models).

● any request switch (Intelligent Key mod-els).

● the keyfob or Intelligent Key.

Keyfob and Intelligent Key operation:

● Push the button. All doors lock.The hazard lights flash twice and the hornbeeps once to indicate all doors arelocked.

● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section or“Comfort & Convenience settings” in the“Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voicerecognition systems” section.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comeson. The light stays on for about 30seconds. The vehicle security system is nowpre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-hicle security system automatically shiftsinto the armed phase. The light beginsto flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’sdoor is unlocked by the key, a requestswitch, the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or if theignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, thesystem will not arm.

● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe driver’s door, the system may notarm. Furthermore, if the key is turnedbeyond the vertical position toward theunlock position to remove the key, thesystem may be disarmed when the keyis removed. If the indicator light fails toglow for a period of time, unlock thedoor once and lock it again.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors closed and lockedwith the ignition key in the OFF posi-tion.

Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after a pe-riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates ifthe vehicle is tampered with again. The alarmcan be shut off by unlocking the driver’s doorwith the key, a request switch or by pressingthe button on the keyfob or IntelligentKey.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening a door without using the key orkeyfob (even if the door is unlocked by usingthe inside lock knob or the power door lockswitch).

● opening the glass hatch without unlockingthe lift gate.

How to stop an activated alarmThe alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’sdoor or the liftgate with the key, pressingthe button on the keyfob or Intelligent Key,or by unlocking all doors with any request switch(Intelligent Key models).


NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ONposition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position and wait approximately 10seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANTASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever theignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACCposition. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allregistered keys that you have when visitingyour NISSAN dealer for service.

LIC0474


SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

�1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operationcan be adjusted by turning the knob toward�A (Slower) or �B (Faster). Also, the inter-mittent operation speed varies in accor-dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-tent operation speed will be faster.)

NOTE:

You can turn on or turn off the drivingspeed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion for vehicles with navigation system.Refer to “Comfort & Convenience settings”in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems” section later inthis manual.

�2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

�3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-tion

Push the lever up �4 to have one sweep opera-tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you �5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with washer fluid concen-trates at full strength. Some methyl al-cohol based washer fluid concentratesmay permanently stain the grille ifspilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the windshield-washer fluid reser-voir. Do not use the windshield-washerfluid reservoir to mix the washer fluidconcentrate and water.

WIC0843

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH


The rear window wiper and washer operate whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF positionto operate the wiper.

�1 Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation(not adjustable)

�2 ON – continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward �3 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the window and ob-scure your vision. Warm the rear windowwith the defroster before you wash therear window.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir isempty.



To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors (if so equipped), start the engine andpush the rear window defroster switch on. Therear window defroster indicator light comes on.Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

WIC0844Type A

LIC1158

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH


Type BLIC1173

Type ALIC0560

Type BLIC0687

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH


HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

�1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

�2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Autolight system (if so equipped)The autolight system allows the headlights to beset so they turn on and off automatically. Theautolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,license plate and instrument panel lights au-tomatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on for a period of time afteryou place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and all doors are closed.

Type CLIC0688 LIC0561


To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-tion �1 .

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns theheadlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition and a door is opened and left open, theheadlights remain ON for a period of time. Ifanother door is opened while the headlights areon, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF, , or position.Be sure you do not put anything on top ofthe autolight sensor �1 located on the topside of the instrument panel. The autolightsensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it isdark out and the headlights will illuminate.If this occurs while parked with the engineoff and the ignition switch placed in the ONposition, your vehicle’s battery could be-come discharged.

Headlight beam select

�1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

�2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

�3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

LIC0835 LIC0562


Battery saver systemIf the ignition switch is placed in the OFF positionwhile the headlight switch is in theor position, the headlights will turn off aftera period of time.

After the headlights automatically turn off with the

headlight switch in the or position,the headlights will illuminate again if the headlightswitch is moved to the OFF position and then

turned to the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis placed in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is in

the , or AUTO position (with auto-lights activated).

Turn the control �A to adjust the brightness of theinstrument panel lights when driving at night.

WIC0917


TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

�1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

�2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switchin the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch tothe position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

LIC0563 LIC0393


Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchplaced in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

To sound the horn, push the area between thehorn icons on the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

LIC0394 WIC1449

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH

HORN


The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, asdesired, depending on the temperature. Theindicator light in the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switchoff.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use theseat heater if you or the occupants cannotmonitor elevated seat temperatures orhave an inability to feel pain in body partsthat contact the seat. Use of the seatheater by such people could result in se-rious injury.

CAUTION

● Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

● Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seatmay become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

● If any malfunctions are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby your NISSAN dealer.

● The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

LIC1041

HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)


The heated steering wheel system is designed tooperate only when the surface temperature of thesteering wheel is below 68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warmthe steering wheel after the engine starts. Theindicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel isbelow 68°F (20°C), the system will heat thesteering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain atemperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicatorlight will remain on as long as the system is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steeringwheel system off manually. The indicator light willgo off.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steeringwheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switchis turned on, the system will not heat thesteering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFFswitch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

LIC0421 LIC1548

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if soequipped)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH


The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones.

The bottom power outlet located on instrumentpanel and the power outlet located in the cargoarea are powered directly by the vehicle’s battery.

The top power outlet located on the instrumentpanel and the power outlet located inside thecenter console are powered only when the igni-tion switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● Only certain power outlets are designedfor use with a cigarette lighter unit. Donot use any other power outlet for anaccessory lighter. See your NISSANdealer for additional information.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

Front rowWIC1268

Center consoleLIC0761

Luggage areaLIC0762

POWER OUTLET


● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water or any otherliquids to contact the outlet.

STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays tohelp prevent injury in an accident or sud-den stop.

Top center tray (if so equipped)LIC1539

Bottom center trayWIC1269

STORAGE


STORAGE BINSCONSOLE BOXPull up on the lever �1 to open the console box lid�2 .

Right-hand side 3rd row trayWIC0830

Front row binWIC1270 LIC0766


GLOVE BOXTo open the top portion of the glove box, push thelatch �A up and raise the lid.

To open the lower portion of the glove box, pullthe handle �B down and lower the lid.

Use the master key to lock or unlock the glovebox. The valet key cannot be used to lock orunlock the glove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

SUNGLASSES HOLDERTo open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed whiledriving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

LIC0768 WIC0673


MAP POCKETS SEAT POCKETSA pocket is located on the back of the driver’sseat.

CUP HOLDERS

The front cup holders have adapters that can beremoved to accommodate larger cups.

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

LIC0772 LIC0575

FrontWIC1271


CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the frontconsole), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid. Ifstepped on, the cup holder is designed to snaploose from the console. To re-install, close thecup holder assembly and push it back into theconsole opening.

To fold the 2nd row bench seat back, first closethe cup holder.

2nd row (rear of front console)WIC0771

3rd row — Type ALIC0773


CAUTION

● Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injure peopleduring sudden braking or an accident.

● Do not use bottle holder for open liquidcontainers.

CARGO AREA STORAGE

To access the floor storage area, push down �1to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle �2to lift the luggage board.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargowith ropes or other types of straps.

3rd row — Type BLIC0774

Bottle holderLIC0784 LIC0777


WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● Use suitable ropes and hooks to securecargo.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-gage area. It is extremely dangerous toride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

● The child restraint top tether strap maybe damaged by contact with items inthe cargo area. Secure any items in thecargo area. Your child could be seri-ously injured or killed in a collision ifthe top tether strap is damaged.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

Side finisherWhen hooking on ropes, do not apply a load ofmore than 55 lb (245 N) to a single �A hook or 44lb (196 N) to a single �B hook.

Floor hooksDo not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N)to a single hook.

WTI0125 LTI0126


ROOF RACK

WARNING

● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle isloaded at or near the cargo carryingcapacity, especially if the significantportion of that load is carried on theroof rack.

● Heavy loading of the roof rack has thepotential to affect the vehicle stabilityand handling during sudden or abnor-mal handling maneuvers.

● Roof rack load should be evenlydistributed.

● Do not exceed maximum roof rack loadweight capacity.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing itemsfrom the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-ably lift the items onto the roof rack fromthe ground, use a ladder or stool.

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roofrack. Do not load more than 200 pounds (91 kg).

WIC0914


Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or itsGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front andrear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on theF.M.V.S.S. label (located on the driver’s doorpillar). For more information regarding GVWRand GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion later in this manual.

The front and rear cross bars (if so equipped) canbe adjusted or removed.

To adjust:

1. Loosen the 2 Torx� head fasteners �A onboth ends of the crossbar.

2. Remove the plugs at the desired position(�C ).

3. Slide the crossbar �B to the desired position(�C ) so that the holes in the crossbar line upwith the holes in the sidebar.

4. Tighten the 2 Torx� head fasteners on bothends of the crossbar.

5. Reinstall the plugs at the previous position�A .

6. Position your luggage on the crossbars andsecure the luggage with rope.

7. Always check the tightness of the Torx�head fasteners.

To remove:

1. Loosen the 2 Torx� head fasteners �A onboth ends of the crossbar.

2. Remove the crossbar from the roof rack.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position, or for aperiod of time after the ignition switch is placed inthe OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’sdoor is opened during this period of time, thepower to the windows is canceled.

WINDOWS


1. Window lock button2. Power door lock switch3. Front passenger’s side automatic

switch4. Right rear passenger window switch5. Left rear passenger window switch6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switchThe driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close the front and rearpassenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold itdown. To close a window, pull the switch andhold it up. To stop the opening or closing functionat any time, simply release the switch.

Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operates onlythe corresponding passenger’s window. To openthe window, push the switch and hold it down �1 .To close the window, pull the switch up �2 .

WIC1124 WIC1265


Rear power window switchThe rear power window switches open or closeonly the corresponding windows. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down �1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up �2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down to thesecond detent and release it; it need not be held.The window automatically opens all the way. Tostop the window, lift the switch up while thewindow is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held. The windowautomatically closes all the way. To stop the win-dow, press the switch down while the window isclosing.

Auto-reverse functionThe auto-reverse function can be activated whena window is closed by automatic operation, whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON position orfor a period of time after the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position.

If the control unit detects something caught in awindow equipped with automatic operation as itis closing, the window will be immediately low-ered.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.

LIC0787 LIC0410


AUTOMATIC MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position. The auto-matic moonroof is operational for a period of time,even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC orOFF position. If the driver’s door or the frontpassenger’s door is opened during this period oftime, the power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroofTo fully open the moonroof, push the switch to-ward DOWN/OPEN �1 .

To fully close the moonroof, push the switchtoward UP/CLOSE �2 .

To open or close the moonroof part way, push theswitch in any direction while the moonroof issliding to stop it in the desired position.

Tilting the moonroofClose the moonroof by pushing the switch to-ward UP/CLOSE �2 . Release the switch, thenpush the UP/CLOSE switch again to tilt themoonroof up.

To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch to-ward DOWN/OPEN �1 .

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open moonroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe moonroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the moonroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the moonroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on themoonroof or surrounding area.

Auto-reverse function (when closing ortilting down the moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be activated whenthe moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-matic operation when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position or for a period of timeafter the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the moonroofoccurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroofwill immediately open backward.

WIC0882

MOONROOF (if so equipped)


When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-mediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keeppushing the tilt down switch within 5 secondsafter it happens; the moonroof will fully closegradually. Make sure nothing is caught in themoonroof.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open moonroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe moonroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the moonroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the moonroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on themoonroof or surrounding area.

SunshadeOpen and close the sunshade by sliding it for-ward or backward.

If the moonroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair themoonroof.

The interior lights have a three-position switchand operate regardless of ignition switch posi-tion.

When the switch is in the ON position �1 , theinterior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-tion. The lights will go off after a period of timeunless the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Type ALIC0789

INTERIOR LIGHTS (if so equipped)


When the switch is in the ON position �2 , theinterior lights will stay on for about 30 secondswhen:

● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key,or the power door lock switch while all doorsare closed and the ignition switch is in theOFF position.

● The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

● The key is removed from the ignition switchwhile all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer is activatedwhen:

● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, akey, or the power door lock switch.

● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition.

The lights will turn off automatically after a periodof time while doors are open to prevent the bat-tery from becoming discharged.

When the switch is in the OFF position �3 , theinterior lights do not illuminate, regardless of doorposition.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

To turn the personal lights on, press the switches.To turn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION


Type BLIC0792 LIC0790

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)


To turn the map lights on, press the switches. Toturn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION


The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-position switch. To operate, push the switch tothe desired position.

ON: The light is illuminated.

Normal (center) position: The light illuminateswhen any door is opened or unlocked by thekeyfob. The light turns off after a period of timewhen all doors are closed.

OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless ofdoor position or lock status.

The HomeLink� Universal Transceiver provides aconvenient way to consolidate the functions of upto three individual hand-held transmitters intoone built-in device.

HomeLink� Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks and se-curity systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLink� will retain all program-ming.

Once the HomeLink� Universal Transceiveris programmed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(Example: new vehicle purchases). Uponsale of the vehicle, the programmedHomeLink� Universal Transceiver buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. Foradditional information, refer to “Program-ming HomeLink�” later in this section.

LIC0791 LIC0590

MAP LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT HOMELINK� UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)


WARNING

● Do not use the HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standards be-came effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-rage door opener which cannot detectan object in the path of a closing garagedoor and then automatically stop andreverse, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

● During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that people orobjects are clear of the garage door,gate, etc. that you are programming.

● Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLink�Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK�

1. To begin, press and hold the two outerHomeLink� buttons (to clear the memory)until the indicator light �1 blinks (after 20seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLink� surface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press andhold both the HomeLink� button you want toprogram and the hand-held transmitter but-ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 hasbeen completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicatorlight on the HomeLink� flashes, changingfrom a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashingblink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.When the indicator light flashes rapidly, bothbuttons may be released. The rapidly flash-ing light indicates successful programming.To activate the garage door or other pro-

WIC0986 WIC0987


grammed device, press and hold the pro-grammed HomeLink� button — releasingwhen the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink� blinksrapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,HomeLink� has picked up a “rolling code”garage door opener signal. You will need toproceed with the next steps to train theHomeLink� to complete the programmingwhich may require a ladder and another per-son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-gram button located on the garage dooropener’s motor to activate the “trainingmode”. This button is usually located nearthe antenna wire that hangs down from themotor. If the wire originates from under alight lens, you will need to remove the lens toaccess the program button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released theprogram button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, youhave 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.Use the help of a second person for conve-nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-ing the garage door opener’s program but-

ton, quickly and firmly press and release theHomeLink� button you’ve just programmed.Press and release the HomeLink� button upto 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink� button should now be pro-grammed. (To program the remainingHomeLink� buttons for additional door orgate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to“clear” all previously programmedHomeLink� buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficultyprogramming your HomeLink� buttons, refer tothe HomeLink� web site at: www.homelink.comor call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK� FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERSPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-onds. To program your hand-held transmitter toHomeLink�, continue to press and hold theHomeLink� button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-gramming HomeLink�”) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly(indicating successful programming).

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-sible damage to the garage door openercomponents.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK�UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLink� Universal Transceiver (once pro-grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-propriate programmed HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver button. The red indicator light willilluminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLink� does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with itsbattery area facing away from theHomeLink� surface.

● press and hold both the HomeLink� andhand-held transmitter buttons without inter-ruption.


● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLink� surface. Hold the transmitter inthat position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLink� is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition – keeping the indicator light in viewat all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,please contact the NISSAN Consumer AffairsDepartment. The phone numbers are located inthe Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,to clear all programming, press and hold the twooutside buttons and release when the indicatorlight begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINK� BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink� Universal Transceiverbutton, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink� but-ton. Do not release the button until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76mm) away from the HomeLink� surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLink� indicator light will flash, firstslowly and then rapidly. When the indicatorlight begins to flash rapidly, release bothbuttons.

The HomeLink� Universal Transceiver button hasnow been reprogrammed. The new device canbe activated by pushing the HomeLink� buttonthat was just programmed. This procedure willnot affect any other programmed HomeLink�buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change thecodes of any non-rolling code device that hasbeen programmed into HomeLink�. Consult theOwner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-facturer or dealer of those devices for additionalinformation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLink� Univer-sal Transceiver with your new transmitterinformation.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation. Note: Changesor modifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-7How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14How to use the remote keyless entryfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Glass hatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Opening the fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Pedal position adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-der chip and chrome NISSAN brandsymbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip3. Key number plate4. Transponder chipA key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

1. Two Intelligent Keys2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent

Keys)3. Key number plateNISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if soequipped)Your vehicle can only be driven with the IntelligentKeys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-ligent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im-mobilizer System components.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

WPD0128 LPD0350

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registeredand used with one vehicle. The new keys must beregistered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use withthe Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle Immobi-lizer System of your vehicle. Since the registra-tion process requires erasing all memory in theIntelligent Key components when registering newkeys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that youhave to the NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the IntelligentKey:

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

● Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,NISSAN recommends erasing the ID codeof that Intelligent Key from the vehicle.This may prevent the unauthorized use ofthe Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle.For information regarding the erasingprocedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,which can be used in case of a discharged bat-tery.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lockknob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it intothe Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns tothe lock position.

The mechanical key can be used for operation inthe same way as an ordinary key.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installedin the Intelligent Key slot.

See “Doors” in this section and “Storage” in the“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

Valet hand-offWhen you have to leave a key with a valet, givethem the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-chanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box or console box frombeing opened during valet hand-off, follow theprocedure below.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-gent Key.

2. Lock the glove box or console box with themechanical key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet andkeep the mechanical key with you.

See “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the masteror valet keys which are registered to the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System components in yourvehicle. These keys have a transponder chip inthe key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the glove boxlock.

To protect your belongings when you leave a keywith someone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. As many as five NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys can be usedwith one vehicle. You should bring all NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have toyour NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-cause the registration process will erase thememory of all key codes previously registeredinto the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.After the registration process, these componentswill only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.Any key that is not given to your dealer at the timeof registration will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.


When the doors are locked using one of thefollowing methods, the doors can not be openedusing the inside or outside door handles. Thedoors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front �1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear �2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral �3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocksall doors �4 .

Opening and closing windowsThe driver’s door key operation allows you toopen and close windows equipped with auto-matic operation at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the rear of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is unlocked.

● To close the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the front of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

Driver’s sideLPD0240

DOORS


LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position �1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position �2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) tothe lock position �1 . When locking the door thisway, be certain not to leave the key inside thevehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the unlock position �2 .

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the key in the ignition switch and anydoor open, all doors will lock and then unlockautomatically. This helps to prevent the keys frombeing accidently locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

● All doors lock automatically when the vehiclespeed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

● All doors unlock automatically when the ig-nition is placed in the OFF position (modelswith Intelligent Key system) or when the keyis removed from the ignition switch (modelswithout Intelligent Key system).

The automatic unlock function can be de-activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-vate the automatic door unlock system, performthe following procedure:

1. Close all doors.


3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,push and hold the power door lock switch tothe position (UNLOCK) for more than5 seconds.

Inside lockLPD0298

Door lock switchWPD0381


4. When activated, the hazard indicator willflash twice. When deactivated, the hazardindicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in theOFF and ON position again between eachsetting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is deac-tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignitionswitch is placed in the OFF position (models withIntelligent Key system) or when the key is re-moved from the ignition switch (models withoutIntelligent Key system). To unlock the door manu-ally, use the inside lock knob or the power doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side).

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCKChild safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the LOCK position, thedoor can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect elec-tric medical equipment. Those who use apacemaker should contact the electricmedical equipment manufacturer for thepossible influences before use.

The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-mits radio waves when the buttons arepressed. The FAA advises the radio wavesmay affect aircraft navigation and com-munication systems. Do not operate theremote keyless entry keyfob while on anairplane. Make sure the buttons are notoperated unintentionally when the unit isstored for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on theinterior lights, and activate the panic alarm byusing the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigationsystem, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature”in this section. For vehicles with navigation sys-tem, refer to “Comfort & convenience settings” inthe “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voicerecognition systems” section in this manual.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehiclebefore locking the doors.

LPD0299

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM(if so equipped)


The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance ofapproximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. Theeffective distance depends upon the conditionsaround the vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the purchaseand use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSANdealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

● the battery is discharged.

● the distance between the vehicle and thekeyfob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate when thekey is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the keyfob:

● Do not allow the keyfob, which containselectrical components, to come intocontact with water or salt water. Thiscould affect the system function.

● Do not drop the keyfob.

● Do not strike the keyfob sharply againstanother object.

● Do not change or modify the keyfob.

● Wetting may damage the keyfob. If thekeyfob gets wet, immediately wipe untilit is completely dry.

● Do not place the keyfob for an extendedperiod in an area where temperaturesexceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the keyfob with a keyholder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the keyfob near equip-ment that produces a magnetic field,such as a TV, audio equipment and per-sonal computers.

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-ommends erasing the ID code of that key-fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-authorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing proce-dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Press the button on the keyfob. Allthe doors lock. The hazard warning lightsflash twice and the horn beeps once toindicate all doors are locked.

LPD0209


● When the button is pressed with alldoors locked, the hazardwarning lights flash twiceand the horn beeps onceas a reminder that thedoors are already locked.

● If a door is open and you press thebutton, the doors will lock but the horn willnot beep and the hazard warning lights willnot flash.

The horn may or may not beep. For vehicleswithout navigation system, refer to “Silencing thehorn beep feature” later in this section. For ve-hicles with navigation system, refer to “Comfort &convenience settings” in the “Monitor, climate,audio, phone and voice recognition system” sec-tion of this manual.

Unlocking doors

Press the button on the keyfob once.

● Only the driver’s door unlocks.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed with the ignitionswitch in any position except the ON posi-tion.

● The interior lights turn on and the light timeractivates for a period of time when the inte-rior light switch is in the DOOR position withthe ignition switch in any position except theON position.

Press the button on the keyfob againwithin 5 seconds.

● All doors unlock.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-ing by inserting the key into the ignition andplacing the ignition switch in the ON or STARTposition, locking the doors with the keyfob orpushing the interior light switch to the off posi-tion.

Auto relock

When the button on the keyfob is pressed,all doors will lock automatically within 1 minuteunless one of the following operations is per-formed:

● Any door is opened.

● A key is inserted into the ignition switch andthe switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

LPD0210


Opening windowsThe keyfob allows you to open windowsequipped with automatic operation simultane-ously.

● To open the windows, press the but-ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec-onds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressingthe button on the keyfob.

The door windows cannot be closed byusing the keyfob.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pressing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for aperiod of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for a period of time, or

● any button is pressed on the keyfob.

Using the interior lights

Press the button on the keyfob once toturn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”in the “Instruments and controls” section in thismanual.

LPD0211


Silencing the horn beep featureIf desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep and light flashfeature with the keyfob, the display screen(if so equipped) will not show the currentmode and cannot be used to change themode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-vious mode and re-enable the displayscreen control.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING

● Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Those whouse a pacemaker should contact theelectric medical equipment manufac-turer for the possible influences beforeuse.

● The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves when the buttons are pressed.The FAA advises the radio waves mayaffect aircraft navigation and communi-cation systems. Do not operate the In-telligent Key while on an airplane. Makesure the buttons are not operated unin-tentionally when the unit is stored for aflight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locksusing the remote controller function or pushingthe request switch on the vehicle without takingthe key out from a pocket or purse. The operatingenvironment and/or conditions may affect theIntelligent Key operation.

Be sure to read the following before using theIntelligent Key.

LPD0262

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if soequipped)


CAUTION

● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

● Never leave the Intelligent Key in thevehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating withthe vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-mental conditions may interfere with the opera-tion of the Intelligent Key under the followingoperating conditions.

● When operating near a location wherestrong radio waves are transmitted, such asa TV tower, power station and broadcastingstation.

● When in possession of wireless equipment,such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,and CB radio.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with orcovered by metallic materials.

● When any type of radio wave remote controlis used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near anelectric appliance such as a personal com-puter.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parkingmeter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditionsbefore using the Intelligent Key function or usethe mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies dependingon the operating conditions, the battery’s life isapproximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-ligent Key indicator will illuminate after the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receivingradio waves, if the key is left near equipmentwhich transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

For models with a steering wheel lock mecha-nism: Because the steering wheel is locked elec-trically, unlocking the steering wheel with theignition switch in the LOCK position is impossiblewhen the vehicle battery is completely dis-charged. Unlocking the steering wheel is impos-sible even if the Intelligent Key is inserted into the

ignition switch. Pay special attention that thevehicle battery is not completely discharged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registeredand used with one vehicle. For information aboutthe purchase and use of additional IntelligentKeys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the IntelligentKey:

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

● Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).


● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent theunauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operatethe vehicle. For information regarding the erasingprocedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be usedwhen the Intelligent Key is within the specifiedoperating range from the request switch �1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged orstrong radio waves are present near the operat-ing location, the Intelligent Key operating rangebecomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key maynot function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)from each request switch �1 .

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,handle or rear bumper, the request switches maynot function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operatingrange, it is possible for anyone, even someonewho does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push therequest switch to lock/unlock the doors.

SPA2038


DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION

● Do not push the door handle request switchwith the Intelligent Key held in your hand asillustrated. The close distance to the doorhandle will cause the Intelligent Key systemto have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-gent Key is outside the vehicle.

● After locking with the door handle requestswitch, verify the doors are securely lockedby testing them.

● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being leftinside the vehicle, make sure you carry theIntelligent Key with you and then lock thedoors.

● Do not pull the door handle before pushingthe door handle request switch. The doorwill be unlocked but will not open. Releasethe door handle once and pull it again toopen the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™OPERATIONYou can lock or unlock the doors without takingthe Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, youcan lock or unlock all doors by pushing the doorhandle request switch within the range of opera-tion.

WPD0375 WRS0806


Locking doors

1. Move the selector to the P (Park) position,place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion and make sure you carry the IntelligentKey with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch �1 or�2 while carrying the Intelligent Key withyou.

4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe outside buzzer sounds twice.

NOTE:

● Doors lock with the door handle requestswitch while the ignition switch is not in theLOCK position.

● Doors do not lock by pushing the doorhandle request switch while any door isopen. However, doors lock with the me-chanical key even if any door is open.

● Doors do not lock with the door handlerequest switch with the Intelligent Key insidethe vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.However, when an Intelligent Key is insidethe vehicle, doors can be locked with an-other Intelligent Key.

WRS0807 WRS0808 WPD0430


CAUTION

● After locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure that the doorshave been securely locked by operatingthe door handles or the rear liftgateopener switch.

● When locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure to have theIntelligent Key in your possession be-fore operating the request switch toprevent the Intelligent Key from beingleft in the vehicle.

● The request switch is operational onlywhen the Intelligent Key has been de-tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protectionis equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doorsare locked, and then the Intelligent Key is putinside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;the lock will automatically unlock and the doorbuzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-ating the request switch to lock the door.Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket oryour other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not functionunder the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the instrument panel.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the glove box or a storage bin.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the door pockets.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side or near metallic materials.

WRS0807


Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch �1 or�2 .

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and theoutside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch �1 or�2 again within 60 seconds to unlock alldoors.

If a door or the liftgate handle is pulled whileunlocking the doors, that door or liftgate may notbe unlocked. Returning the handle to its originalposition will unlock the door or liftgate. If the door

or liftgate does not unlock after returning thehandle, push the door handle request switch tounlock the door and liftgate.

All doors and the liftgate will be locked automati-cally unless one of the following operations isperformed within one minute after pushing therequest switch:

● Opening any door or the liftgate.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a period oftime when a door is unlocked and the room lightswitch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waitingby performing one of the following operations:

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the remote controller.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can operate alldoor locks using the remote keyless function ofthe Intelligent Key. The remote keyless functioncan operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) awayfrom the vehicle. The operating distance de-pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-tion under the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is not within theoperational range.

● When the doors or the rear liftgate are openor not closed securely.

● When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged.

WRS0808 WPD0430


CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure not to leave the key inthe vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the IntelligentKey.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure that the doors have beensecurely locked by operating the doorhandles.

WPD0359


Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the IntelligentKey.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within 5 sec-onds to unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed within 1minute after pressing the button:

● Opening any doors.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for a period of timewhen a door is unlocked and the room lightswitch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting byperforming one of the following operations:

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.

Opening windows

The Intelligent Key allows you to open windowsequipped with automatic operation simultane-ously.

● To open the windows, press the but-ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than 3seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressingthe button on the Intelligent Key.

The door windows cannot be closed byusing the Intelligent Key.

Linking the keyfob to automatic drivepositioner memoryIf the vehicle is equipped with automatic drivepositioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memorysetting.

See “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.

WPD0360


Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pressing and holding the button on theIntelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for aperiod of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

● It has run for a period of time, or

● Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

● Pushing the request switch on the driver orpassenger door with the Intelligent Key inrange of the door handle.

Silencing the horn beep featureIf desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the Intelligent Key.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep and light flashfeature with the Intelligent Key, the displayscreen (if so equipped) will not show thecurrent mode and cannot be used tochange the mode. Use the Intelligent Key toreturn to the previous mode and re-enablethe display screen control.

WPD0374 WPD0362


To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALSTo help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-pectedly by erroneous operation of the IntelligentKey or to help prevent the vehicle from beingstolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside andoutside the vehicle and a warning is displayed inthe instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning isdisplayed, be sure to check the vehicle and theIntelligent Key.

See the “Troubleshooting guide” that follows and“Warnings/indicator lights and audible remind-ers” in the “Instruments and controls” section ofthis manual.


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEVerify the location of all Intelligent Keys that areprogrammed for the vehicle. If another IntelligentKey is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehiclesystem may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When stopping the engineThe SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-play and the inside warning chime soundscontinuously.

The shift selector is not in the P (Park)position.

Move the shift selector to the P (Park)position.

When opening the driver’s door to get outof the vehicle

The inside warning chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

When closing the door after getting out ofthe vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on thedisplay, the outside chime sounds 3 timesand the inside warning chime sounds forapproximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-play and the outside chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC positionand the shift selector is not in the P (Park)position.

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion and place the ignition switch in theOFF position.

When closing the door with the inside lockknob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately3 seconds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle requestswitch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately2 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.The door handle request switch is pushedbefore the door is closed.

Push the door handle request switch afterthe door is closed.


�1 Pull the hood lock release handle locatedbelow the driver’s side instrument panel. Thehood will spring up slightly.

�2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to theside as illustrated with your fingertips andraise the hood.

�3 Insert the support rod into the slot on theunderside of the hood.

When closing the hood, return the hood rod to itsoriginal position. Lower the hood approximately12 in (30 cm) above the latch and release it. Thisallows proper engagement of the hood latch.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

WARNING

● Always be sure the lift gate has beenclosed securely to prevent it from open-ing while driving.

● Do not drive with the lift gate open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-fore closing the lift gate.

LPD0302

HOOD LIFT GATE


The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors including the lift gate simultane-ously.

To open the lift gate, push the lift gate releaseswitch under the license finisher to release thelatch. Pull the lift gate open.

To close, lower and gently push the lift gatedown. The power latch will engage to securelylatch the lift gate.

To open, pull up on the smaller outside handle torelease the glass hatch, then pull up on the glasshatch. To close, lower and push the glass hatchdown securely.

NOTE:

The lift gate must be unlocked in order toopen the glass hatch.

WARNING

Do not drive with the glass hatch open.This could allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaustgas” in the “Starting and driving” sectionof this manual.

LPD0300 LPD0301

GLASS HATCH


OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER LID

Pull on the finger tab to open.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also causethe Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-sage will be displayed if the fuel-fillercap is not properly tightened. It maytake a few driving trips for the messageto be displayed. Failure to tighten thefuel-filler cap properly after the LOOSEFUEL CAP warning message is dis-played may cause the Malfunc-tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler capproperly may cause the Malfunc-tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.If the light illuminates becausethe fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,tighten or install the cap and continueto drive the vehicle. The lightshould turn off after a few driving trips.If the light does not turn off after afew driving trips, have the vehicle in-spected by a NISSAN dealer.

WPD0436

FUEL-FILLER DOOR


● For additional information, see the“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionin this manual.

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise toremove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder �1while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until asingle click is heard.

Loose Fuel Cap warning message

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message dis-plays in the odometer when the fuel-filler cap isnot tightened correctly after the vehicle has beenrefueled. It may take a few driving trips for themessage to be displayed. To turn off the warningmessage, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as pre-viously described as soon as possible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset but-ton �A in the meter for about 1 second toturn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warningmessage after tightening the fuel-filler cap.

LPD0253 LRS2004


TILT OPERATION

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust thesteering wheel up or down to the desired posi-tion.

Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheelin place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the pedal position whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-justed for driving comfort.

Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust thebrake and accelerator pedal position away fromthe driver �1 or toward the driver �2 .

The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad-justed separately.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the pedal position with yourfoot on the pedal.

LPD0304 LPD0305

STEERING WHEEL PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (if soequipped)


�1 To block glare from the front, swing down themain sun visor.

�2 To block glare from the side, remove themain sun visor from the center mount andswing the visor to the side.

�3 Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped)in or out as needed.

CAUTION

● Do not store the sun visor before return-ing the extension to its originalposition.

● Do not pull the extension sun visorforcedly downward.

VANITY MIRRORSTo access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanitymirrors are illuminated and turn on when themirror cover is open.

WPD0315

WPD0307

SUN VISORS


REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The night position �1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position �2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-cally dims during night time conditions and ac-cording to the intensity of the headlights of thevehicle following you. The automatic anti-glarefeature is activated when the ignition switch is inthe ON position.

The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-matic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors�1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of thesensors, resulting in improper operation. Type A

The indicator light �2 will illuminate when theautomatic anti-glare feature is operating.

With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-tion, press the button as described:

● To turn off the anti-glare feature, pressthe button for 8 seconds. The indica-tor light will turn off.

● To turn on the anti-glare feature, pressthe button again for 8 seconds. Theindicator light will turn on.

WPD0126Type A

WPD0446

MIRRORS


For information on the compass display (if soequipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.

Type B and Type C

The indicator light �2 will illuminate when theautomatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

● the O button for inside mirrors withoutcompass.

● the button for inside mirrors withcompass.

The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,press:

● the | button for inside mirrors withoutcompass.

● the button for inside mirrors withcompass.

The indicator light will turn on.

For information on HomeLink� Universal Trans-ceiver operation, see the “HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

For information on the compass display (if soequipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.

Type B-Without compassLPD0469

Type C-With compassLPD0470


OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Move the small switch �1 to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired positionusing the large switch �2 .

WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.You could lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-tional information, see “Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

Foldable outside mirrorsPull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

LPD0237 LPD0259


The automatic drive positioner system has twofeatures:

● Memory storage function

● Entry/exit function

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTIONTwo positions for the driver’s seat, acceleratorand brake pedals, and outside mirrors can bestored in the automatic drive positioner memory.Follow these procedures to use the memory sys-tem.

1. Place the shift selector in the P (Park) posi-tion.


3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator andbrake pedals, and outside mirrors to thedesired positions by manually operatingeach adjusting switch. For additional infor-mation, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats,seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-tem” section of this manual and “Pedal posi-tion adjustment” and “Outside mirrors” ear-lier in this section.

During this step, do not place the ignitionswitch in any position other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,push the memory switch (1 or 2).

The indicator light for the pushed memoryswitch will come on and stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.After the indicator light goes off, the se-lected positions are stored in the selectedmemory (1 or 2).

If a new memory is stored in the same memoryswitch, the previous memory will be deleted.

LPD0306

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (ifso equipped)


Linking a keyfob to a stored memorypositionEach keyfob can be linked to a stored memoryposition (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-ing procedure:

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-tion.

2. While the indicator light for the memoryswitch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-onds, press the button on the keyfob.The indicator light will blink. After the indica-tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to thatmemory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition switch orthe ignition switch is moved to OFF, pressthe button on the keyfob. The driver’s seat,accelerator and brake pedals, and outside mir-rors will move to the memorized position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is saved to thememory switch, the keyfob automaticallyre-links.

Confirming memory storage

● Place the ignition switch in the ON positionand push the SET switch. If the main memoryhas not been stored, the indicator light willcome on for approximately 0.5 seconds.When the memory has stored the position,the indicator light will stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds.

● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse opens, the memory storage function willbe canceled and must be restarted before astored memory position can be set again.Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) torestart the memory storage function. Youcan also restart the memory storage functionusing the following procedure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace thefuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more than2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.

Once the memory storage function has beenrestarted, you can store a memory position.See “Memory storage function” in this sec-tion.

Selecting the memorized position

Set the shift selector to the P (Park) position,then:

● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’sdoor, push the memory switch (1 or 2) or

● Place the ignition switch in the ON positionand push the memory switch (1 or 2).

The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals,and outside mirrors will move to the memorizedposition with the indicator light blinking, and thenthe light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seatwill automatically move when the shift selector isplaced in the P (Park) position. This allows thedriver to get into and out of the driver’s seat moreeasily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward:

● When the key is removed from the ignitionswitch and the driver’s door is opened.

● When the driver’s door is opened with theignition switch placed in the LOCK position.

● When the ignition switch is turned fromACC to LOCK with the driver’s door open.


The driver’s seat will return to the previous posi-tion:

● When the key is inserted into the ignitionswitch and the driver’s door is closed.

● When the driver’s door is closed with theignition switch placed in the LOCK position.

● When the ignition switch is turned fromACC to ON while the shift selector is in the P(Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-celed. For vehicles with navigation system, see“Comfort & convenience settings” in the “Moni-tor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognitionsystems” section of this manual. For vehicleswithout navigation system, see your NISSANdealer.

Restarting the entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuseopens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) torestart the entry/exit function. You can also restartthe entry/exit function using the following proce-dure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace thefuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more than2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will notwork or will stop operating under the followingconditions:

● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h).

● When any of the memory switches arepushed while the automatic drive positioneris operating.

● When the adjusting switch for the driver’sseat is turned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.

● When the seat has been already moved tothe memorized position.

● When no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

● When the shift selector is moved from P(Park) to any other position.

● When the driver’s door remains open morethan 45 seconds and the ignition switch isnot in the ON position.

The automatic drive positioner system can beadjusted and canceled. For vehicles with naviga-tion system, see “Comfort & convenience set-tings” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems” section of thismanual. For vehicles without navigation system,see your NISSAN dealer.


4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voicerecognition systems

Control panel buttons — color screen withoutNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Control panel buttons — color screen withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Heater and air conditioner (manual)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

Rear seat air conditioner (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-49Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68CompactFlash� (CF) player operation(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73Music Box� (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75CD/CF (CompactFlash�) care and cleaning . . . . . . 4-84Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-86Remote audio system controls(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

NISSAN mobile entertainment system (MES)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . . 4-90Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91Flip-down screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91Before operating the DVD mobileentertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92Playing a digital versatile disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94Remote control operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System withoutNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-105

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-117Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-119

Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-122Pairing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-122Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-124Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-125Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-126During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-127Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-128Phone setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-128Call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-130

NISSAN Voice Recognition System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-131

NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode . . . . .4-132Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-134

Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-134Giving voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-134NISSAN Voice Recognition AlternateCommand Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143

Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-150Speaker Adaptation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-152Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-155

WARNING

● Positioning of the heating or air condi-tioning controls and display controlsshould not be done while driving in or-der that full attention may be given tothe driving operation.

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest NISSANdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock.

1. NISSAN controller (P. 4-5)

2. STATUS button (P. 4-6)

3. + (brightness control) button

4. OFF brightness control button(P. 4-18)

5. INFO button (P. 4-6)

6. – (brightness control) button

7. SETTING button (P. 4-11)

8. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-5)

WHA0881

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLORSCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

● The glass display screen may break if itis hit with a hard or sharp object. If theglass screen breaks, do not touch it.Doing so could result in an injury.

● To clean the display, never use a roughcloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or anykind of solvent or paper towel with achemical cleaning agent. They willscratch or deteriorate the panel.

● Do not splash any liquid such as wateror car fragrance on the display. Contactwith liquid will cause the system tomalfunction.

When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition) for a long time, it will dischargethe battery, and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button — This is a button on the controlpanel.

“Display”key — This is a select key on the screen.By selecting this key you can proceed to the nextfunction.

HOW TO USE THE NISSANCONTROLLERUse the NISSAN controller to choose an item onthe display screen. Highlight an item on the dis-play using the main directional buttons �2 or thecenter dial �3 . Then press the ENTER button �1to select the item or perform the action.

The BACK button �4 has two functions:

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button �4 during setup,the setup will be canceled and/or the display willreturn to the previous screen.

● Finish setup.

In some screens pressing the BACK button �4accepts the changes made during setup.

WHA0883

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THESCREENVehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-tion is made or menu item is highlighted, differentareas on the screen provide you with importantinformation. See the following for details:

1. Header:Shows the path used to get to the currentscreen (for example, press the SETTINGbutton > then select the “Audio” key).

2. Menu Selections:Shows the options to choose within thatmenu screen (for example, Bass, etc.).

3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:Shows that the NISSAN controller may beused to move UP/DOWN on the screen andselect more options.

4. Screen Count:Shows the number of menu selections avail-able for that screen (for example, 5/6).

5. Footer/Information Line:Provides more information (if available)about the menu selection currently high-lighted (for example, Enhances stereo imag-ing and sound).

HOW TO USE THE STATUSBUTTONTo display the status of the audio, climate controlsystem and fuel consumption, press the STATUSbutton.

The following information will appear when theSTATUS button is pressed:

Audio → Audio and climate control system →Audio, climate control temperature settings, av-erage fuel economy and distance to empty →Audio

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTONPress the INFO button. The display screenshows vehicle information for your convenience.

The information shown on the screen should be aguide to determine the condition of the vehicle.See the following for details.

LHA0914 LHA0915


Fuel economy

Press the INFO button, then select the “FuelEconomy” key using the NISSAN controller andpress the ENTER button to display Average FuelEconomy, Distance to Empty and Fuel EconomyRecord.

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance to Empty (DTE) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The DTE is constantlycalculated based on the amount of fuel in the fueltank and the actual fuel consumption. The displayis updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel levelis low, the DTE display will change to (*).

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while theignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-play just before the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position may con-tinue to be displayed.


Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated basedon fuel consumption since the last reset. Thedisplay is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mi(500 m). After a reset or connecting the batterycables, the display might show (**.*).

Resetting fuel economy

The average fuel economy calculation can bereset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” keyusing the NISSAN controller.

Fuel economy record

Press the INFO button, then select the “FuelEconomy” key, then select the “View” key usingthe NISSAN controller.

The average fuel consumption history will bedisplayed in a graph form along with the averagefuel for the previous reset-to-reset period.

LHA0921 LHA0922


Tire pressure information (if soequipped)

To display tire pressure information, press theINFO button, then select the “Tire Pressure” keyusing the NISSAN controller and press the EN-TER button.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed onthe screen does not correspond with the actualorder of the tire position.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on theheat caused by the vehicle’s traveling conditionand the temperature.

In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-played on the screen:

LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Con-tact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


Trip computerPress the INFO button, then select the “TripComputer” key using the NISSAN controller andpress the ENTER button.

The trip computer will display the following items:

● Elapsed Time – Journey time since the lastreset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59minutes.

● Driving Distance – Distance driven (mile orkm) since the last reset.

● Average Speed – Average speed driven(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

LHA0923 LHA0924


Resetting the trip computer

Each item in the trip computer can be reset to 0.Select the “Reset” key on the item that needs tobe reset using the NISSAN controller and pressthe ENTER button.

To reset all of the items in the trip computer selectthe “Reset ALL”key and press the ENTER button.A confirmation screen will appear. Select the“Yes” key and press the ENTER button.

Maintenance itemsPress the INFO button and select the “Mainte-nance” key using the NISSAN controller; themaintenance information will be displayed on thescreen.

Changing the maintenance interval

Select one of the “Reminder (1 – 4)” keys usingthe NISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton to display the screen to change the main-tenance interval.

Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN con-troller and press the ENTER button. Use theNISSAN controller to change the maintenanceinterval. To accept the changes, press the BACKbutton.

LHA0925 LHA0926


Resetting the maintenance interval

To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0 mi(km), select the “Reset Distance” key using theNISSAN controller.

Displaying the maintenance notice re-minder

Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key to displaythe MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati-cally at the set maintenance interval. The indica-tor light will illuminate when it is ON.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-tomatically displayed as shown when both of thefollowing conditions are met:

● The vehicle is driven the set distance and theignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition the next time the vehicle will be driven.

To return to the previous display after the MAIN-TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, pressthe BACK button.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displayseach time the key is turned ON until one of thefollowing conditions are met:

● The “Reset” key is selected.

● The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set toOFF (indicator light not illuminated).

● The maintenance interval is set again.LHA0839


HOW TO USE THE SETTINGBUTTONWhen the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-TINGS screen will appear on the display. You canselect and/or adjust several functions, featuresand modes that are available for your vehicle. Usethe NISSAN controller to select each item to beset and press the ENTER button.

Display settingsSelect the “Display” key. The Display settingsscreen will appear.

Type ALHA0927

Type BWHA0937 LHA0929


Brightness/contrast:

Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” keyto adjust the brightness or contrast of the mapbackground. Use the NISSAN controller to adjustthe brightness to darker or brighter and the con-trast to lower or higher.

The new settings are automatically saved whenyou exit the setting screen by pressing the BACKbutton or any other mode button.

Display off:

Select the “Display ON” key. The amber indicatornext to “Display ON” turns off and the messageabove will be displayed briefly. When the audio,HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any modebutton on the control panel is operated, the dis-play turns on for that operation. If one of thecontrol panel buttons is pressed, the display willnot automatically turn off until that operation isfinished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-matically after 5 seconds.

To turn the screen on:

● Press the SETTING button, select the “Dis-play” key and then select the “Display ON”key. Then set the screen to on by pressingthe ENTER button, or

● Hold the OFF button for approxi-mately 2 seconds and the message “resum-ing display”will appear and the “Display ON”key will be automatically turned on (no am-ber indicator).

Background color:

Select the “Background Color” key; the displaycolor changes between day and night.


LHA0930 WHA0823


Beeps settingsSelect the “Beeps” key and press the ENTERbutton. The Beeps settings screen will appear.

With this option on (indicator light illuminated), abeep will sound if any control panel button ispressed.

ClockThe following display will appear after pressingthe SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”key using the NISSAN controller and pressingthe ENTER button.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-nated), a clock is always displayed in the upperright corner of the screen.

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12h (12–hour) clock display orthe 24h (24–hour) clock display.

Daylight Savings Time:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off thedaylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; theamber indicator light will disappear.

LHA0931 LHA0932


Time Zone:

Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zonescreen will appear.

Select one of the following zones, depending onthe current location, by selecting the correct timezone key and pressing the ENTER button toenable that time zone (indicator light will illumi-nate for that location).

● Pacific

● Mountain

● Central

● Eastern

● Atlantic

● Newfoundland

● Aleutian

● Hawaii

● Alaska

Clock Adjust:

Adjust the time by manually inputting the correcttime.

● 0 – 9:Select to change the number in the display.

● Modify:Select to change the number at the cursorposition.

● >:Select to move the cursor position to theright.

● <:Select to move the cursor position to the left.

LHA0933 LHA0943


● OK:Select to accept the changes made andreturn to the clock setting display.

After selection/settings, press the BACK buttonor any other mode button to accept the changes.

Comfort & Convenience settings (if soequipped)Select the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using theNISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-ton. The comfort and convenience option screenwill be displayed.

You can set the following operating conditions byselecting the desired item using the NISSANcontroller, then pressing the ENTER button. Theindicator light (box at the right of the selecteditem) alternately turns on and off each time theENTER button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ONIndicator light is not illuminated — OFF

LHA0938 LHA0939


Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on orturn off the illumination of the interior lights whenany door is unlocked.

Auto Headlights Sensitivity: Select to adjustthe sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher(right) or lower (left).

Auto Headlights Off Delay: Select to changethe duration of the automatic headlight off timerfrom 0-, 30-, 45-, 60-, 90-, 120-, 150- and180-second periods.

Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turnon or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-cally according to the vehicle speed.

Remote Key Response Horn: Select to turnon or turn off the horn beep mode used when theLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the mode willnot be changed with the display. Use thekeyfob to return to the previous mode andre-enable the display control.

Remote Key Response Lights: Select to turnon or turn off the hazard indicator flash modeused when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on thekeyfob is pressed.

NOTE:


Auto Re-Lock Time: Select to set the length oftime before doors automatically re-lock.

Selective Door Unlock: When this item isturned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked firstafter the door unlock operation. When the doorhandle request switch on the driver’s or frontpassenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,only the corresponding door is unlocked first. Allthe doors can be unlocked if the door unlockoperation is performed again within 1 minute.

When this item is turned to off, all the doors willbe unlocked after the door unlock operation isperformed once.

Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turnon or turn off the door lock/unlock function bypushing the door handle request switch.

Intelligent Key Lock Reply: Select to changethe sound of the Intelligent Key mode used whena door handle request switch is pushed to lock.

Select to turn off all sounds made when a doorhandle request switch is pushed, by selecting the“OFF” key.

Intelligent Key Unlock Reply: Select tochange the sound of the Intelligent Key modeused when a door handle request switch ispushed to unlock.


Return All Settings to Default: Select tochange all the comfort and convenience systemsto their default settings.


Language / UnitsUse the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan-guage / Units” key. Select which setting you wantto change using the NISSAN controller.

Select Language:

Select the “English” key, the “Français” key or the“Español” key to change the language shown onthe display.

Select Units:

Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”(km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the unitsshown on the display.

Audio settingsFor audio settings, refer to “Audio System” in thissection.

LHA0934 LHA0935 LHA0936


OFF BUTTON

To change the display brightness, pressthe OFF button. Pressing the button againwill change the display to the day or thenight display. The brightness can then beadjusted using the NISSAN controller.

The display brightness can also be adjusted us-ing the + (brighter) button or the � (dimmer)button.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, thedisplay will return to the previous display.

Press and hold the OFF button for morethan 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press thebutton again to turn the display on.

1. STATUS button (P. 4-22)

2. DEST button*

3. NISSAN controller (P. 4-19)

4. PHONE button**

5. OFF brightness control button(P. 4-34)

6. INFO button (P. 4-22)

7. SETTING button (P. 4-27)

8. VOICE button*

LHA0880

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)


9. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-19)

10. ROUTE button*

11. ZOOM IN button*

12. MAP button*

13. ZOOM OUT button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

**For information on the PHONE button, see“Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System withNavigation System” later in this section.

When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will discharge the battery, and theengine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button — This is a button on the controlpanel.

“Display”key — This is a select key on the screen.By selecting this key, you can proceed to the nextfunction.

HOW TO USE THE NISSANCONTROLLERUse the NISSAN controller to choose an item onthe display screen. Highlight an item on the dis-play using the main directional buttons �2 (cer-tain Navigation System functions use the addi-tional directional buttons �6 ) or the center dial�3 . Then press the ENTER button �1 to selectthe item or perform the action.

The BACK button �4 has two functions:

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button �4 during setup,the setup will be canceled and/or the display willreturn to the previous screen.

● Finish setup.

In some screens, pressing the BACK button �4accepts the changes made during setup.

For the VOICE button �5 functions, refer to theseparate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH SCREEN

CAUTION

● The glass display screen may break if itis hit with a hard or sharp object. If theglass screen breaks, do not touch it.Doing so could result in an injury.

● To clean the display, never use a roughcloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or anykind of solvent or paper towel with achemical cleaning agent. They willscratch or deteriorate the panel.

● Do not splash any liquid such as wateror car fragrance on the display. Contactwith liquid will cause the system tomalfunction.

LHA0882


To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-not be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not availablewhile driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-ate the navigation system.

WARNING

● ALWAYS give your full attention todriving.

● Avoid using vehicle features that coulddistract you. If distracted, you couldlose control of your vehicle and causean accident. Touch screen operation

With this system, the same operations as thosefor the NISSAN controller are possible using thetouch screen operation.

Selecting the item:

Touch an item to select. To select the “Audio” key,touch the “Audio” key �1 on the screen. Touchthe “BACK” key �2 to return to the previousscreen.

Adjusting the item:

Touch the “+” key �1 or the “�” key �2 to adjustthe settings. Touch the “UP”key �3 to scroll up tothe previous page, or touch the “DOWN” key �4to scroll down to next page.

WHA0885 WHA0887


Inputting characters:

Touch the letter or number key �1 .

There are some options available when inputtingcharacters.

● Uppercase:Shows uppercase characters.

● Lowercase:Shows lowercase characters.

● Space:Inserts a space.

● Symbols:Shows symbols such as the question mark(?).

● Delete:Deletes the last inputted character with onetouch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key todelete all of the characters.

● OK:Completes the character input.

Touch screen maintenanceIf you clean the display screen, use a dry, softcloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use asmall amount of neutral detergent with a softcloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-tergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe thescreen.

START-UP SCREENWhen you place the ignition switch in the ACC orON position, the SYSTEM START-UP warning isdisplayed on the screen. When you read andagree with the warning, press the ENTER button.

If you do not push the ENTER button, you will notbe able to use the navigation system.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separateNavigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THESCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-tion is made or menu item is highlighted, differentareas on the screen provide you with importantinformation. See the following for details.

1. Header:Shows the path used to get to the currentscreen (for example, press the SETTING but-ton > then select the “Comfort & Conv.” key).

WHA0889 LHA0890


2. Menu Selections:Shows the options to choose within thatmenu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illu-mination, etc.).

3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:Shows that the NISSAN controller may beused to move UP/DOWN on the screen andselect more options.

4. Screen Count:Shows the number of menu selections avail-able for that screen (for example, 1/14).

5. Footer/Information Line:Provides more information (if available)about the menu selection currently high-lighted (for example, Cabin lighting whenunlocking doors).

HOW TO USE THE STATUS BUTTONTo display the status of the audio, climate controlsystem, fuel consumption and navigation system,press the STATUS button.

The following information will appear when theSTATUS button is pressed:

Audio → Audio and climate control system →Audio, climate control temperature settings, av-erage fuel economy and distance to empty →Audio, climate control temperature settings andNavigation System → Audio

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTONPress the INFO button; the display screen showsvehicle and navigation information for your con-venience.

The information shown on the screen should be aguide to determine the condition of the vehicle.See the following for details.

Fuel economy

Press the INFO button, then select the “FuelEconomy” key using the NISSAN controller andpress the ENTER button to display Average FuelEconomy, Distance to Empty and Fuel EconomyRecord.

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance to Empty (DTE) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The DTE is constantlycalculated based on the amount of fuel in the fueltank and the actual fuel consumption. The displayis updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel levelis low, the DTE display will change to (*).

LHA0892 LHA0893


NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while theignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-play just before the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position may con-tinue to be displayed.


Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated basedon fuel consumption since the last reset. Thedisplay is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mi(500 m). After a reset or connecting the batterycables, the display might show (**.*).

Resetting fuel economy

The average fuel economy calculation can bereset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” keyusing the NISSAN controller and press the EN-TER button.

Fuel economy record

Press the INFO button, then select the “FuelEconomy” key, then select the “View” key usingthe NISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton.

The average fuel consumption history will bedisplayed in a graph form along with the averagefuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

Tire pressure information

To display tire pressure information, press theINFO button, then select the “Tire Pressure” keyusing the NISSAN controller and press the EN-TER button.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed onthe screen does not correspond with the actualorder of the tire position.

LHA0894 LHA0895


Tire pressure rises and falls depending on theheat caused by the vehicle’s traveling conditionand the temperature.

In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-played on the screen:

LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Con-tact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


Trip computerPress the INFO button, then select the “TripComputer” key using the NISSAN controller andpress the ENTER button.

The trip computer will display the following items:

● Elapsed Time – Journey time since the lastreset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59minutes.

● Driving Distance – Distance driven (miles orkm) since the last reset.

● Average Speed – Average speed driven(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

Resetting the trip computer

Each item in the trip computer can be reset to 0.Select the “Reset” key on the item that needs tobe reset using the NISSAN controller and pressthe ENTER button.

To reset all of the items in the trip computer selectthe “Reset ALL”key and press the ENTER button.A confirmation screen will appear; select the“Yes” key and press the ENTER button.

LHA0896


Maintenance itemsPress the INFO button and select the “Mainte-nance” key using the NISSAN controller; themaintenance information will be displayed on thescreen.

Changing the maintenance interval

Select one of the “Reminder (1 – 4)” keys usingthe NISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton to display the screen to change the main-tenance interval.

Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN con-troller and press the ENTER button. Use theNISSAN controller to change the maintenanceinterval. To accept the changes, press the BACKbutton.

Resetting the maintenance interval

To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0 mi(km), select the “Reset Distance” key using theNISSAN controller.

LHA0897 LHA0898


Displaying the maintenance notice re-minder

Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key to displaythe MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati-cally at the set maintenance interval. The indica-tor light will illuminate when it is ON.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-tomatically displayed as shown when both of thefollowing conditions are met:

● The vehicle is driven the set distance and theignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition the next time the vehicle will be driven.

To return to the previous display after the MAIN-TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, pressthe BACK button.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displayseach time the key is turned ON until one of thefollowing conditions are met:

● The “Reset” key is selected.

● The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set toOFF (indicator light not illuminated).

● The maintenance interval is set again.

Other items

Press the INFO button and select the “Others”key using the NISSAN controller and press theENTER button to view information on the naviga-tion and voice recognition systems.

Voice Recognition

For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSANVoice Recognition system” in this section.

Navigation version

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

LHA0839 LHA0908


Traffic InfoRefer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Where am I?Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

GPS Satellite Info.Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

HOW TO USE THE SETTINGBUTTONWhen the SETTING button is pressed, the Set-tings screen will appear on the display. You canselect and/or adjust several functions, featuresand modes that are available for your vehicle. Usethe NISSAN controller to select each item to beset.

Display settingsSelect the “Display” key and press the ENTERbutton. The Display settings screen will appear.

LHA0884 LHA0901


Brightness/contrast:

Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” keyto adjust the brightness or contrast of the displaybackground. Use the NISSAN controller to adjustthe brightness to darker or brighter and the con-trast to lower or higher.


Display off:

Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the“Display ON” turns amber and the messageabove will be displayed briefly. When the audio,HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any modebutton on the control panel is operated, the dis-play turns on for that operation. If one of thecontrol panel buttons is pressed, the display willnot automatically turn off until that operation isfinished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-matically after five seconds.

To turn the screen on:

● Press the SETTING button and select the“Display” key and then select the “DisplayON” key. Then set the screen to on by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Hold the OFF button for approxi-mately two seconds and the message “re-suming display” will appear and the “DisplayON” key will be automatically turned on (noamber indicator).

Background color:

Select the “Background Color” key; the displaycolor changes between day and night.


LHA0902 WHA0823


ClockThe following display will appear after pressingthe SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”key using the NISSAN controller and pressingthe ENTER button.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-nated), a clock is always displayed in the upperright corner of the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost exactlybecause it is always adjusted by the GPS system.

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12h (12–hour) clock display orthe 24h (24–hour) clock display.

Offset Adjust:

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing perminute.

Daylight Saving Time:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-nated), daylight saving time is on. To turn off thedaylight saving time, touch the “ON” key; theamber indicator light will disappear.

Time Zone:

Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zonescreen will appear.

Select one of the following zones, depending onthe current location, by selecting the correct timezone key and pressing the ENTER button toenable that time zone (indicator light will illumi-nate for that location).

● Pacific

● Mountain

● Central

● Eastern

LHA0904 LHA0905


● Atlantic

● Newfoundland

● Hawaii

● Alaska

After selection/settings, press the BACK buttonor any other mode button to accept the changes.

Comfort & Convenience settingsSelect the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using theNISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-ton. The comfort and convenience option screenwill be displayed.

You can set the following operating conditions byselecting the desired item using the NISSANcontroller, then pressing the ENTER button. Theindicator light (box at the right of the selecteditem) alternately turns on and off each time theENTER button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

LHA0938 LHA0939


Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on orturn off the illumination of the interior lights whenany door is unlocked.

Auto Headlights Sensitivity: Select to adjustthe sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher(right) or lower (left).

Auto Headlights Off Delay: Select to changethe duration of the automatic headlight off timerfrom 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 secondperiods.

Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turnon or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-cally according to the vehicle speed.

Remote Key Response Horn: Select to turnon or turn off the horn chirp mode used when theLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

NOTE:


Remote Key Response Lights: Select to turnon or turn off the hazard indicator flash modeused when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on thekeyfob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lightflash feature with the keyfob, the mode willnot be changed with the display. Use thekeyfob to return to the previous mode andre-enable the display control.

Auto Re-Lock Time: Select to set the length oftime before doors automatically re-lock.

Selective Door Unlock: When this item isturned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked firstafter the door unlock operation. When the doorhandle request switch on the driver’s or frontpassenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,only the corresponding door is unlocked first. Allthe doors can be unlocked if the door unlockoperation is performed again within one minute.

When this item is turned to off, all the doors willbe unlocked after the door unlock operation isperformed once.

Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turnon or turn off the door lock/unlock function bypushing the door handle request switch.

Intelligent Key Lock Reply: Select to changethe sound of the Intelligent Key mode used whena door handle request switch is pushed to lock.


Intelligent Key Unlock Reply: Select tochange the sound of the Intelligent Key modeused when a door handle request switch ispushed to unlock.


LHA0940


Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit: Select to turnon or turn off the driver’s seat moving backwardfor easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFFposition and the driver’s door is opened. Aftergetting into the vehicle and placing the ignitionswitch in the ACC position, the driver’s seatmoves to the previous position.

Return All Settings to Default: Select tochange all the comfort and convenience systemsto their default settings.

Others settingsSelect the “Others” key using the NISSAN con-troller. Voice recognition, language and units set-ting screen will be displayed.

Voice Recognition:

For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSANVoice Recognition system” later in this section.

Language / Units:

Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan-guage / Units” key and press the ENTER button.Select which setting you want to change usingthe NISSAN controller and selecting either the“Select Language” key or the “Select Units” keyby pressing the ENTER button.

LHA0909 LHA0911


Select Language:

Select the “English” key or the “Français” key tochange the language shown on the display.

If you select the “Français” key, French languagewill be displayed so please use the French Own-er’s Manual. To obtain a French Owner’s Manual,please see “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Or-der Information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section.

Select Units:

Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”(km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the unitsshown on the display.

Audio settings

For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” in thissection.

Navigation settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding these set-tings.

Volume and beeps settingsNavigation volume

For navigation volume settings refer to the sepa-rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for infor-mation regarding these settings.

Phone volume

For phone volume settings refer to “Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System With Navigation Sys-tem” later in this section.

LHA0912 LHA0913


Beep setting

With this option on (indicator light illuminated), abeep will sound if any control panel button ispressed.

Phone settingsFor phone settings refer to “Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System With Navigation System”later in this section.

OFF BUTTON

To change the display brightness, pressthe OFF button. Pressing the button againwill change the display to the day or thenight display. The brightness can then beadjusted using the NISSAN controller.

If no operation is performed within 10 seconds,the display will return to the previous display.

Press and hold the OFF button for morethan two seconds to turn the display off. Pressthe button again to turn the display on.

When the shift selector is shifted into the R(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows arearward view from the vehicle.

WARNING

● The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary ob-jects to help avoid damaging the ve-hicle. The system will not detect smallobjects below the bumper, and may notdetect objects close to the bumper oron the ground.

● The RearView Monitor is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safeto do so before backing up. Alwaysback up slowly.

● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-tor differ from actual distance becausea wide-angle lens is used.

● Make sure that the lift gate is securelyclosed when backing up.

● Do not put anything on the rearviewcamera. The rearview camera is in-stalled beside the license plate light.

WHA0903

REARVIEW MONITOR (if soequipped)


● When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causing wa-ter condensation on the lens, a mal-function, fire or an electric shock.

● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-function or cause damage resulting in afire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera.Do not scratch the cover when cleaningdirt or snow from the cover.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINESLines which indicate the vehicle clearance anddistances to objects with reference to the bum-per line �A are displayed on the monitor.

They are indicated as reference distances toobjects. The lines and colors in the display indi-cate distances from the back bumper line �A inthe illustration.

�1 1.5 ft (0.5 m) red

�2 3 ft (1 m) yellow

�3 7 ft (2 m) green

�4 10 ft (3 m) green

The vehicle clearance lines are wider thanthe actual clearance.

ADJUSTING THE SCREENTo adjust the quality of the screen, press theSETTING button.

● To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,Tint, Color, Contrast, and Black Level of theRearView Monitor, press the SETTING but-ton with the RearView Monitor on, thentouch one of the adjustment keys. Press the“–” or “+” key on the item and adjust thelevel.

● Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tintand Color of the RearView Monitor while thevehicle is moving.

LHA0437 LHA1021


OPERATING TIPS

● When the shift selector is shifted to R (Re-verse), the monitor screen automaticallychanges to the RearView Monitor mode.However, the radio can be heard.

● It may take some time until the RearViewMonitor is displayed after the shift selectorhas been shifted to R (Reverse). Objectsmay be distorted momentarily until the Rear-View Monitor screen is displayed com-pletely. When the shift selector is returned toa position other than R (Reverse), it may takesome time until the screen changes. Objectson the screen may be distorted until they arecompletely displayed.

● When the temperature is extremely high orlow, the screen may not clearly display ob-jects. This is not a malfunction.

● When strong light directly enters the cam-era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on thescreen. This is due to strong reflected lightfrom the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

● The screen may flicker under fluorescentlight. This is not a malfunction.

● The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-tor may differ somewhat from those of theactual object.

● When the contrast of objects is low at night,pressing the SETTING button may notchange the brightness.

● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in adark place or at night.

● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,the RearView Monitor may not display ob-jects. Clean the camera.

● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner toclean the camera. This will cause discolor-ation. To clean the camera, wipe with a clothdampened with a diluted mild cleaning agentand then wipe with a dry cloth.

● Do not damage the camera as the monitorscreen may be adversely affected.

● Do not use body wax on the camera window.If body wax does get on the camera window,wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-ened with mild detergent diluted with water.


Adjust air flow direction for the driver and pas-senger side windows �1 , driver and passengerfront �2 , center �3 , rear passenger compartment�4 , and rear center console (if so equipped)vents �5 by moving the vent slide and/or ventassemblies.

LHA0488Rear center console vents (if so equipped)

WHA0510

VENTS


WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

1. Fan control dial2. Temperature control dial3. Air flow control dial4. Air conditioner button5. Rear window defroster switch6. Air recirculation button

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select theair flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and side ventswith maximum cooling.

— Air flows from center and side vents.— Air flows from center and side vents

and foot outlets.— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets and

foot outlets.— Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

LHA0489

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual) (if so equipped)


Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position (Indicator light on):Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

OFF position (Indicator light off):Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired (1 to 4) position and push thebutton to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator

light on the button will come on. Pushthe button again to turn off the air condi-tioner. The indicator light on the button willgo off.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window and outside mirror (if soequipped) defroster switchFor more information about the rear window andoutside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch,see “Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch” in the “Instruments and controls” sectionof this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

HeatingThis mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets.

1. Push the button to the off position fornormal heating.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to theposition.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side andcenter vents.

1. Push the button to the off position.



4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.





● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to 4 and thetemperature control lever to the full HOTposition.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light will not illuminate) if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). If the system is in defrost mode formore than one minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until the fancontrol dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle isshut off, even if the air flow control dial isturned to a position other than theposition. This dehumidifies the air whichhelps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowing out-side air to be drawn into the passengercompartment to further improve the defog-ging performance.

Bi-level heating

This mode directs cooler air from the side andcenter vents and warmer air from the floor outlets.When the temperature control dial is moved tothe full hot or full cool position, the air betweenthe vents and the floor outlets is the same tem-perature.



3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.


Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light on the button willnot come on) if the outside temperature ismore than 36°F (2°C). If the air flow controldial is in the position for more thanone minute, the air conditioning system willcontinue to operate until the fan control dialis turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off,even if the air flow control dial is turned to aposition other than the position. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to furtherimprove the defogging performance.

Operating tipsClear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.


AIR CONDITIONER OPERATIONStart the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position, and push in the button toactivate the air conditioner. When the air condi-tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functionsare added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

CoolingThis mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.




4. Push the button. The indicator lightcomes on.


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe on position (indicator light on). Be sureto return the button to the off positionfor normal cooling.

Dehumidified heatingThis mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.






Dehumidified defoggingThis mode is used to defog the windows anddehumidify the air.




When the air flow control dial is in theor position, the air conditioner automati-cally turns on (however, the indicator light will notilluminate) if the outside temperature is more than36°F (2°C). If one of these positions is selectedfor more than one minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until the fan con-trol dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off,even if the air flow control dial is turned to aposition other than these positions. This dehu-midifies the air which helps defog the windshield.The mode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passenger com-partment to further improve the defogging perfor-mance.


Operating tips

● Keep the windows and moonroof (if soequipped) closed while the air conditioner isin operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for two or threeminutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.


● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from thevents in hot, humid conditions as the air iscooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-function.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. For additional informationon heating and cooling, see “Heater and air con-ditioner (manual)” in this section. The air recir-culation ( ) button should always be inthe OFF position for heating and defrost-ing.

WHA0780


WHA0781 WHA0782


WHA0783 WHA1063


1. Driver temperature control dial/AUTObutton

2. A/C ON/OFF button3. Fan speed control (increase)4. Front window defroster button5. MODE button6. Passenger temperature control dial/

DUAL button7. System OFF8. Fan speed control (decrease)9. Rear window defroster switch10. Air recirculation button

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.


● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)

This mode may be normally used all year round asthe system automatically works to keep a con-stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on. (AUTO will bedisplayed.)

2. Turn the driver’s side temperature controldial to the left or right to set the desiredtemperature. Driver and passenger tem-peratures can be set independently. PressDUAL to activate dual climate control func-tions. Turn the passenger’s side temperaturecontrol dial to the left or right to set thedesired passenger’s temperature.

● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

LHA0859

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)


● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/offare also controlled automatically.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from thevents in hot, humid conditions as the air iscooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-function.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the defroster control button toturn the system on. The display will show thedefrost icon.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or rightto set the desired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of thewindows, press the fan control speed buttonuntil it reaches the maximum speed .

● As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, press the AUTO button to return tothe auto mode.

● When the defroster control button isactivated, the air conditioner will automati-cally be turned on at outside temperaturesabove 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode formore than one minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until the fancontrol is turned OFF, the vehicle is shut off,or the A/C button is pressed even if the airflow MODE control button is used to select aposition other than the position. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The air recirculation mode auto-matically turns off, allowing outside air to bedrawn into the passenger compartment tofurther improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control buttons

Press the fan speed control buttons + / –to manually control the fan speed.

Press OFF to turn the system off.

Press the AUTO button to return to automaticcontrol of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Push the air recirculation button to recir-culate interior air inside the vehicle. Push theAUTO button to return to automatic mode.

The air recirculation button will not be activatedwhen the air conditioner is in DEF, floor, orfloor/defrost mode.

Air flow controlPressing the MODE button manually controls airflow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system offPress the OFF button.

OPERATING TIPS● When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flowfrom the foot outlets may not operate for amaximum of 150 seconds. However, this isnot a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-ture warms up, air flow from the foot outletswill operate normally.


The sunload sensor �1 , located on the top centerof the instrument panel, helps the system main-tain a constant temperature. Do not put anythingon or around this sensor.

Rear seat temperature and fan speed can becontrolled from both the front seat overhead con-sole controls or the rear seat controls (on back ofcenter console).

Press the REAR CTRL button to transfer controlof the rear climate functions to the rear passen-gers.

To operate the rear air conditioner, the enginemust be running.

If the rear seat fan control dial is set to (0), the airconditioner is turned off. If it is set to any of the fanspeed positions, air is discharged from the rearvents at the corresponding speed.

LIC0835 LHA0628

REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER (if soequipped)


1. Rear fan speed control dial2. Rear temperature control dialCONTROLS

Fan control dialThe fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on andoff and controls fan speed.

Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows rear passen-gers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand oil recommendations” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

RADIO

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the VOL (volume)/ON·OFF(power) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen tothe radio with the engine not running, the ignitionswitch should be placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Rear seat rear climate controlsWHA1193

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM


Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise to comefrom the audio system speakers. Storing the de-vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTIONRange: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FMhaving slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-nal influences may sometimes interfere with FMstation reception even if the FM station is within25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal isdirectly related to the distance between thetransmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-acteristics as light. For example, they will reflectoff objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter), static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTIONAM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)When the satellite radio is used for the first timeor the battery has been replaced, the satelliteradio may not work properly. This is not a mal-function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satelliteradio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal orlarge building for satellite radio to receive all ofthe necessary data.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless anoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM�* satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna canaffect satellite radio performance. Remove theice to restore satellite radio reception.

* XM� is a registered trademark of XM SatelliteRadio, Inc.


AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or low.Decrease/increase the temperaturebefore use.

● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capability torecord or burn CDs.

LHA0099


● If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

● Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Remove theCD by pressing the EJECT button. Aftera short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperature ofthe player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)CD).

CompactFlash� (CF) player (if soequipped)

● Do not force a CF card into the slot. Thiscould damage the CF card and/or player.

● During cold weather or rainy days, the playermay malfunction due to the humidity. If thisoccurs, remove the CF card and dehumidifyor ventilate the player completely.

● The CF player sometimes cannot functionwhen the passenger compartment tempera-ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-perature before use.

● Do not expose a CF card to direct sunlight.

● Confirm that a CF card is inserted correctly.

Compact disc (CD)/CompactFlash�(CF) with MP3 or WMA

Terms:

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digital audiofile format. This format allows for near “CDquality” sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion of anaudio track from CD/CF can reduce the filesize by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling:44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually noperceptible loss in quality. MP3 compres-sion removes the redundant and irrelevantparts of a sound signal that the human eardoesn’t hear.

● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is acompressed audio format created by Micro-soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMAcodec offers greater file compression thanthe MP3 codec, enabling storage of moredigital audio tracks in the same amount ofspace when compared to MP3s at the samelevel of quality.


● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital music file.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyis the rate at which the samples of a signalare converted from analog to digital (A/Dconversion) per second.

● Multisession — Multisession is one of themethods for writing data to media. Writingdata once to the media is called a singlesession, and writing more than once is calleda multisession.

● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is thepart of the encoded MP3 or WMA file thatcontains information about the digital musicfile such as song title, artist, album title,encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.ID3 tag information is displayed on theAlbum/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows� and Windows Media� are regis-tered trademarks and trademarks of the Micro-soft Corporation in the United States of Americaand/or other countries.

CompactFlash� is a registered trademark of theSanDisk� Corporation in the United States ofAmerica and/or other countries.

Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD/CF with MP3 orWMA files is as illustrated.

● The names of folders not containing MP3 orWMA files are not shown in the display.

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“Root Folder” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which thefiles were written by the writing software.Therefore, the files might not play in thedesired order.

Playback order chartWHA1078


Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, CF

Supported file systemsCD, CD-R, CD-RW:ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.CompactFlash card: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Supportedversions*1

MP3Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4

Tag informationID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only)WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels

With navigation system:Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)Without navigation system:Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitationWith navigation system: 128 charactersWithout navigation system: 64 characters

Displayable character codes*301: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.


Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters forfolder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applica-tions or other text editing applications.Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.It takes a relatively long timebefore the music startsplaying.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music startsplaying.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match thespecifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit ratefiles

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to thenext song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, theplayer will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.


1. PRESET A·B·C button2. CD eject button3. MENU button4. CD insert slot5. CD button6. FM·AM button

7. TUNE buttons8. RPT button9. PWR button/VOL control knob10. RDM button11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons12. SEEK buttons

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see �Audio opera-tion precautions� earlier in this section.

Audio main operation

Power button and VOL control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition, then press the PWR (power) button. Ifyou listen to the radio with the engine not running,place the ignition switch in the ACC position. Themode (radio or CD) that was playing immediatelybefore the system was turned off resumes play-ing.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.Pressing the PWR button again turns the systemoff.

Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increasevolume or to the left to decrease volume.

MENU button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE,BALANCE and CLOCK):

Press the MENU button to change the mode asfollows:

BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → Audio→ BAS

WHA1075


To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, pressthe MENU button until the desired mode appearsin the display. Press the SEEK button to adjustBass and Treble to the desired level. You can alsouse the SEEK button to adjust Fade and Balancemodes. Fade adjusts the sound level between thefront and rear speakers and Balance adjusts thesound between the right and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the MENU button repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

NOTE:

If the clock is enabled, pressing the MENUbutton will change the mode as follows:BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK →Hour adjustment → Minute adjustment →Audio → BAS

For more information on setting the clock, see“Clock set” later in this section.

Clock operation

Press the MENU button until CLOCK is dis-played; use the SEEK button to turn the clockdisplay on (CLK ON) or off (CLK OFF).

Clock set

If the clock is not displayed with the ignitionswitch in the ACC or ON position, you need toselect the CLK ON mode. Press the MENU but-ton repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed. Use theSEEK button to enable CLK ON mode.

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly untilCLOCK mode appears; press the SEEKbutton until CLK ON appears.

2. Press the MENU button again; the hours willstart flashing.

3. Press the SEEK button or toadjust the hour.

4. Press the MENU button again; the displaywill switch to the minute adjustment mode.

5. The minutes will start flashing. Press SEEK

button or to adjust the minutes.

6. Press the MENU button again to exit theclock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 10 seconds, or press the MENU buttonagain to return to the regular clock display.

Resetting the time

Hold the MENU button down and then press theTUNE/SEEK button; the time will reset as fol-lows:

● If the displayed minutes before the reset arein the range of :00 - :29, the hour displayedbefore the reset will stay the same and theminutes will be reset to :00.

● If the displayed minutes before the reset arein the range of :30 - :59, the hour displayedbefore the reset will advance by one hourand the minutes will be reset to :00.

For example, if the MENU button and theTUNE/SEEK button are pressed while the timedisplayed is between 8:00 and 8:29, the displaywill be reset to 8:00. If the buttons were pressedwhile the time was between 8:30 and 8:59, thedisplay will be reset to 9:00. At the same time thedisplay will return to the audio.

FM/AM radio operationFM·AM button:

Press the FM·AM button to change from AM ←→FM reception.

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.


TUNE buttons:

Manual tuning

Press the TUNE or button for lessthan 0.5 seconds for manual tuning.

To move quickly through the channels, press and

hold either TUNE or button downfor more than 1.5 seconds.

SEEK buttons:

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK or button to seekthrough the frequencies. Seek tuning beginsfrom low to high frequencies, or high to lowfrequencies, depending on which button ispressed, and stops at the next broadcasting sta-tion. Once the highest broadcasting station isreached, the radio continues in the seek mode atthe lowest broadcasting station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio tothe A, B and C preset button in any combinationof AM or FM stations.

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to changebetween storage banks. The radio displaysthe icon A, B or C to indicate which set ofpresets are active.

2. Tune to the desired station using manualTUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any ofthe desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)until a beep sound is heard. (The radio muteswhen the select button is pressed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operationIf the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turnsoff and the last used compact disc starts to play.

TUNE (rewind and fast

forward) buttons:

When the TUNE or button ispressed while the compact disc is playing, thecompact disc plays at an increased speed whilerewinding or fast forwarding. When the button isreleased, the compact disc returns to normal playspeed.

SEEK buttons:

When is pressed while the compact discis playing, the next track following the presentone starts to play from the beginning.Press several times to skip several tracks.Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-pears in the display window. (When the last trackon the compact disc is skipped, the first track isplayed.)

When is pressed, the track being playedreturns to the beginning. Press severaltimes to skip back several tracks. Each time thebutton is pressed, the CD moves back one track.


SEEK (Scan CDs) button:

Press and hold the SEEK button for morethan 1.5 seconds to scan through the first 10seconds of a track on the compact disc. TheSCAN icon is flashed during scan mode.

The scan mode is canceled once it scans throughall the tracks on the disc, or if the SEEKor button is pressed during the scanmode.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while the com-pact disc is being played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

1 ←→ Normal

1: The track that is currently playing will be re-peated.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while the com-pact disc is being played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

RDM ←→ Normal

RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently play-ing will be played randomly.

CD EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with a com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

When the button is pressed while thecompact disc is being played, the compact discwill eject and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display when theCD is loaded with the system on.


1. RADIO AM·FM button*2. PRESET A·B·C button3. RPT button4. speaker control button5. RDM button6. PAUSE·MUTE button

7. REAR CTRL button8. SCAN button9. TRACK button10. SEEK/CAT button11. TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob12. CD load button

13. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons14. CD eject button15. VOL/ON·OFF control knob16. DISC·AUX button

LHA0944


*When the RADIO AM·FM button ispressed, the satellite radio mode will beskipped unless an optional satellite re-ceiver and antenna are installed and anXM� satellite radio service subscriptionis active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (ifso equipped)

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-tion precautions” earlier in this section.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless anoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM� satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.


VOL/ON·OFF control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and then push the VOL/ON·OFF controlknob while the system is off to call up the mode(radio or CD) which was playing immediatelybefore the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFFcontrol knob.

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-ing speed changes.

AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Bal-ance and Fade):

Push the AUDIO control knob to change themode as follows:

Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, pushthe AUDIO control knob until the desired modeappears in the display. Turn the tuning knob toadjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. Youcan also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade andBalance modes. Fade adjusts the sound levelbetween the front and rear speakers and Balanceadjusts the sound between the right and leftspeakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, push the AUDIO control knob re-peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati-cally reappear after about 10 seconds.

Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):

To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, pressthe SETTING button. Then select the “Audio” keyusing the NISSAN controller, then press the EN-TER button. The audio settings screen will bedisplayed. Select the “–” key or “+” key, thenpress the ENTER button to change the SSV.

While in this screen you can also adjust the otheraudio settings by selecting the correspondingkey.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the BACK button.

LHA0927


For information on how to use the NISSAN con-troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”earlier in this section.

Precision phased audio (if so equipped):

To turn on or off the precision phased audio,press the SETTING button. Select the “Audio”key using the NISSAN controller, then press theENTER button, the audio settings screen will bedisplayed. Select the “Precision Phased Audio”key, then press the ENTER button. If the amberindicator light is displayed, the precision phasedaudio is enabled. Pressing the ENTER buttonagain will turn off the precision phased audio, theindicator light will disappear.

When this item is turned on, super high pitchsound and super low pitch sound are empha-sized and midrange sound is played naturally.

While in this screen, you can also adjust the otheraudio settings by selecting the correspondingkey.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the BACK button.

For information on how to use the NISSAN con-troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”earlier in this section.

Clock set:

For setting the clock, see “Clock” under the“Control panel buttons – color screen withoutnavigation system” heading earlier in this section.

WHA0941 WHA0928


CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CDcertain text might be able to be displayed (whenCD encoded with text is being used).

Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD isencoded the following text might be able to bedisplayed by selecting the “Text” key using theNISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-ton:

● Folder displays the name of the currentfolder being accessed.

● File displays the name of the file currentlyplaying.

● Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of thesong name.

● Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of thealbum name.

● Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of theartist’s name.

● Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur-rently playing.

● Track displays the name of the song on theCD currently playing.

Some of this text or modes might not displaywhile playing a regular CD. Press the BACKbutton to exit the CD text display screen.

PAUSE·MUTE button:

To mute or pause the audio sound, press thePAUSE·MUTE button.

Press the PAUSE·MUTE button again to resumethe audio sound.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the RADIO AM·FM button will changethe band as follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed whilethe ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,the radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.

*When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed, thesatellite radio mode will be skipped unless anoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM� satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIOAM·FM button is pressed, the compact disc willautomatically be turned off and the last radiostation played will come on.

WHA0946 WHA0947


The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FLDR (Tuning) knob:

To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDRknob to the right or left.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

tuning buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button or theTRACK button for less than 1.5 secondsto tune from high to low or low to high frequen-cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing theSCAN button again during this 5 second periodwill stop scan tuning and the radio will remaintuned to that station. If the SCAN button is notpressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves tothe next station.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory operations):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using thePRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT stationband.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.


5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.


Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-

rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the button, then pressone of the CD insert (1–6) slots. Insert the com-pact disc into the slot with the label side facingup. The compact disc will be guided automati-cally into the slot and start playing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing theVOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compactdisc.


button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, pressthe button for less than 1.5 seconds. Se-lect the loading slot by pressing the CD insertselect button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press andhold the button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

DISC·AUX button:

When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, the systemwill turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with thecompact disc loaded with the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off and thecompact disc will start to play.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons:

When the SEEK/CAT button is pressedwhile a compact disc is playing, the track beingplayed returns to its beginning. Press severaltimes to skip back through tracks. The compactdisc will go back the number of times the buttonis pressed.

When the TRACK button is pressed whilethe compact disc is playing, the next track willstart to play from its beginning. Press severaltimes to skip through tracks. The compact discwill advance the number of times the button ispressed. (When the last track on the compactdisc is skipped through, the first track will beplayed.)

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-lect tracks when a CD is being played.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Rewind·Fast Forward)

buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)button or the TRACK (fast forward) buttonwhile a compact disc is playing, the compact discwill play while rewinding or fast forwarding. Whenthe button is released, the compact disc willreturn to normal play speed.

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded with the tape or the radio play-ing, the tape or radio will automatically be turnedoff and the compact disc will start to play.

TUNE FLDR (Folder) knob

While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn theTUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward orbackward through available folders.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press aCD select button (1 – 6).

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while the com-pact disc is played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRK RPT →ALL DISC RPT

MP3/WMA CD:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDERRPT → 1 TRK RPT → ALL DISC RPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.1 TRK RPT: The track that is currently playing willbe repeated1 FOLDER RPT: The folder that is currently beingaccessed will be repeated.


RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while the com-pact disc is played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD:

ALL DISC MIX → 1 DISC MIX → ALL DISC MIX

MP3/WMA CD:

ALL DISC MIX → 1 DISC MIX → 1 FOLDER MIX→ ALL DISC MIX

ALL DISC MIX: All discs loaded will be played ina mixed order.1 DISC MIX: The tracks on the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played in a mixed order.1 FOLDER MIX: The tracks in the folder that iscurrently being accessed will be played in amixed order.

SCAN button:

While listening to a CD, press the SCAN buttonto preview the first 10 seconds of each track onthe CD playing. Pressing the SCAN button againduring this 10 second period stops the scan andthe CD remains on that track.

REAR CTRL:

Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rearseat audio controller on. Rear Controls UN-LOCKED will display. Pressing the REAR CTRLbutton again to turn the rear seat audio controlleroff. Rear Controls LOCKED will display. If thevehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audiocontroller, the display will show “Rear ControlsNot Available”.

Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for ap-proximately 1.5 seconds to turn on the rear dis-play screen. Rear Display ON will display. Pressand hold the REAR CTRL button again will turnthe rear display screen off. Rear Display OFF willdisplay. If the vehicle is not equipped with a reardisplay screen, the display will show “Rear Con-trols Not Available”.

(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:

Press the button to turn the rear speakersoff and the headphones on. Press this buttonagain to turn rear seat speakers back on and theheadphones off.

CD EJECT:

Current/Selected disc:

● Press the button, then press the slotnumber (1 – 6) for the desired disc. Thecompact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loadeddisc will be ejected. If the ejected disc is notremoved within 15 seconds, the disc willreload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 20 seconds or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence,the entire disc eject sequence will be can-celed.

When this button is pressed while a compactdisc is playing, the compact disc will eject andthe last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer in CD modeonly.


AUX jack

The AUX jack �1 is located below the air condi-tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack acceptsany standard analog audio input, such as from aportable cassette tape player, MP3 player or alaptop computer.

Press the DISC·AUX button to play a compatibledevice when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

LHA1017


1. PRESET A·B·C button2. DISC/AUX button3. speaker control button4. REAR CTRL button5. SCAN·RPT button6. TRACK button

7. SEEK/CAT button8. TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob9. CompactFlash� insert slot10. Station select (1 - 6) buttons11. CD eject button12. VOL/ON·OFF control knob

13. AM·FM/SAT button*14. MUSIC BOX button

WHA0945


*When the AM·FM/SAT button ispressed, the satellite radio mode will beskipped unless an optional satellite re-ceiver and antenna are installed and anXM� satellite radio service subscriptionis active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if soequipped)

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-tion precautions” earlier in this section.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless anoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM� satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.


VOL/ON·OFF control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and then push the VOL/ON·OFF controlknob while the system is off to call up the mode(radio or CD) which was playing immediatelybefore the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFFcontrol knob.

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-ing speed changes.

AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Bal-ance and Fade):

Push the AUDIO control knob to change themode as follows:

Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, pushthe AUDIO control knob until the desired modeappears in the display. Turn the tuning knob toadjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. Youcan also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade andBalance modes. Fade adjusts the sound levelbetween the front and rear speakers and Balanceadjusts the sound between the right and leftspeakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, push the AUDIO control knob re-peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati-cally reappear after about 10 seconds.

Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):

To change the SSV mode from OFF (0) to 5,press the SETTING button. Then touch the “Au-dio” key and the audio settings screen will bedisplayed. Touch the “–”key or “+”key, to changethe SSV.

While in this screen you can also adjust the otheraudio settings by touching the correspondingkey.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, touch the “BACK” key.

LHA0884


Precision phased audio (if so equipped):

To turn on or off the precision phased audio,press the SETTING button. Then touch the “Au-dio” key; the audio settings screen will be dis-played. Touch the “Precision Phased Audio ON”key. If the amber indicator light is displayed, theprecision phased audio is enabled. Touching the“Precision Phased Audio ON” key again will turnoff the precision phased audio; the indicator lightwill disappear.

When this item is turned on, super high pitchsound and super low pitch sound are empha-sized and midrange sound is played naturally.

While in this screen, you can also adjust the otheraudio settings by touching the correspondingkey.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, touch the “BACK” key.

Clock set:

For setting the clock, see “Clock” under the“Control panel buttons – color screen withoutnavigation system” heading earlier in this section.

LHA0900 WHA0942


CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CDcertain text might be able to be displayed (whenCD encoded with text is being used).

Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD isencoded the following text might be able to bedisplayed by touching the “Text” key:






● Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur-rently playing.

● Track displays the name of the song on theCD currently playing.

Some of this text or modes might not displaywhile playing a regular CD. Press the BACKbutton to exit the CD text display screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the RADIO AM·FM button will changethe band as follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed whilethe ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,the radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.

*When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed, thesatellite radio mode will be skipped unless anoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM� satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIOAM·FM button is pressed, the compact disc willautomatically be turned off and the last radiostation played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

WHA0949 WHA0950


TUNE/FLDR (Tuning) knob:

To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDRknob to the right or left.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

tuning buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button or theTRACK button for less than 1.5 secondsto tune from high to low or low to high frequen-cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN·RPT (SCAN tuning) button:

Press the SCAN·RPT button to initiate scan tun-ing. Scan tuning will stop at each broadcastingstation for 5 seconds. Press the SCAN·RPT but-ton again during this 5 second period to stopscan tuning; the radio will remain tuned to thatstation. If the SCAN·RPT button is not pressedwithin 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the nextstation.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory operations):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using thePRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT stationband.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.


5. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.


Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and insert the compact disc into the slotwith the label side facing up. The compact discwill be guided automatically into the slot and startplaying.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing theVOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compactdisc.

DISC/AUX button:

When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, thesystem will turn on and the compact disc will startto play.

When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with thecompact disc loaded but the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off and thecompact disc will start to play.


SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons:

When the SEEK/CAT button is pressedwhile a compact disc is playing, the track beingplayed returns to its beginning. Press severaltimes to skip back through tracks. The compactdisc will go back the number of times the buttonis pressed.

When the TRACK button is pressed whilethe compact disc is playing, the next track will startto play from its beginning. Press several times toskip through tracks. The compact disc will advancethe number of times the button is pressed. (Whenthe last track on the compact disc is skippedthrough, the first track will be played.)

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-lect tracks when a CD is being played.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Rewind·Fast Forward)

buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)button or the TRACK (fast forward) buttonwhile a compact disc is playing; the compact discwill play while rewinding or fast forwarding. Whenthe button is released, the compact disc willreturn to normal play speed.

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded with the tape or the radio play-ing, the tape or radio will automatically be turnedoff and the compact disc will start to play.

TUNE FLDR (Folder) knob

While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn theTUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward orbackward through available folders.

SCAN·RPT (random and repeat) button:

When the SCAN·RPT button is pressed while thecompact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

CD:

1 DISC RPT → 1 TRK RPT → 1 DISC RDM → 1DISC RPT

MP3/WMA CD:

1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRK RPT →1 DISC RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → 1 DISC RPT

1 DISC RPT: the entire disc will be repeated.1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will berepeated.1 DISC RDM: all tracks will be played randomly.

1 FOLDER RPT: the folder currently being ac-cessed will be repeated.1 FOLDER RDM: the tracks in the current folderbeing accessed will be played randomly.

REAR CTRL:

Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rearseat audio controller on. Rear Controls UN-LOCKED will display. Pressing the REAR CTRLbutton again will turn the rear seat audio control-ler off. Rear Controls LOCKED will display. If thevehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audiocontroller, the display will show “Rear ControlsNot Available”.

Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for ap-proximately 1.5 seconds to turn the rear displayscreen on. Rear Display ON will display. Pressand hold the REAR CTRL button again to turn therear display screen off. Rear Display OFF willdisplay. If the vehicle is not equipped with a reardisplay screen, the display will show “Rear Con-trols Not Available”.

(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:

Press the button to turn the rear speakersoff and the headphones on. Press this buttonagain to turn rear seat speakers back on and theheadphones off.


CD EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

When the button is pressed while thecompact disc is being played, the compact discwill eject and the system will turn off.

AUX jack

The AUX jack �1 is located below the air condi-tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack acceptsany standard analog audio input, such as from aportable cassette tape player, MP3 player or alaptop computer.

Press the DISC/AUX button to play a compatibledevice when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

COMPACTFLASH� (CF) PLAYEROPERATION (if so equipped)

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition, and insert a CF card �1 into the Com-pactFlash� player slot �2 . Then press theDISC/AUX button repeatedly to switch to theCompactFlash� mode.

If the system has been turned off while the Com-pactFlash� card was playing, pressing theVOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the Com-pactFlash� card.

LHA1017 LHA1018


DISC/AUX button:When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the CF card inserted, the systemwill turn on. If another audio source is playing anda CF card is inserted, press the DISC/AUX but-ton repeatedly until the center display changes tothe CompactFlash� mode.

CF display mode

While listening to CF certain text might be able tobe displayed.

Depending on how the files are encoded on theCF the following text might be able to be dis-played by touching the “Text” key:






Press the BACK button to exit the CF text displayscreen.

WHA0953 WHA0954


SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button while the CFcard is playing to return to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press the TRACK buttonwhile the CF card is playing to skip to the begin-ning of the next track.

If you press and hold the SEEK/CAT (re-wind) button or the TRACK (fast forward)button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds,the CF card will play while rewinding or fastforwarding. When the SEEK/CAT (rewind)button or the TRACK (fast forward) buttonis released, the CF card will return to the normalplaying speed.

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-lect tracks when the CF card is being played.

For more information on how to use the NISSANcontroller, see “How to use the NISSAN control-ler” earlier in this section.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the CF card either:

● Turn the TUNE/FLDR knob right or left.

● Touch the desired folder key on screen.

● Use the NISSAN controller.

SCAN·RPT button:

Pressing the SCAN·RPT button while the CFcard is playing changes the play pattern as fol-lows:

1 CF CARD RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRKRPT → 1 CF CARD RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM →1 CF CARD RPT

1 CF CARD RPT: the entire CF card will berepeated.1 FOLDER RPT: the folder currently being ac-cessed will be repeated.1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will berepeated.1 CF CARD RDM: all the tracks on the CF cardwill be played randomly.1 FOLDER RDM: the tracks in the current folderbeing accessed will be played randomly.

CF eject:Press the knob next to the CF slot while a CFcard is inserted to eject the CF card.

Troubleshooting messages:The following messages will be displayed undercertain conditions:

● Reading CompactFlash�The system is reading the CF card insertedin the slot.

● No CompactFlash� cardA CF card is not inserted in the slot.

● CompactFlash� read errorThe system cannot read the CF card.

● Unplayable fileThe system cannot play a music file.

● No audio fileThe CF card inserted in the slot or its folderdoes not contain any music files.

Compatibility with other media:

If a commercially available CompactFlash�adapter is inserted into the slot, other memorymedia can also be used.

MUSIC BOX� (if so equipped)

The Music Box system can store songs from CDsbeing played. The system has a 9.3 gigabyte(GB) storage capacity.

The following CDs can be recorded in the MusicBox system:

● CDs without MP3/WMA files.

● Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (HybridCD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs.

● Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) speci-fication in CD-Extras.


● First session of multisession disc.

Extreme temperature conditions [below �4°F(�20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affectthe performance of the hard-disk.

NOTE:

If the hard drive needs to be replaced dueto a malfunction, all stored music data willbe erased.

Recording CDs

1. Operate the audio system to play a CD.For information on playing CDs, see “Com-pact Disc (CD) player operation” earlier inthis section.

2. Touch the “REC” key. REC CD appears onthe screen.

NOTE:

● The system starts playing and recording the1st track on the CD when the “REC” key isselected.

● Individual tracks from a CD cannot be se-lected to be recorded to the Music Box.

● The skip, fast forward and rewind featuresare disabled while the CD is recording.

● The recording process can be stopped atany time. All tracks that were played beforethe CD was stopped are stored.

● Individual tracks can be deleted from thehard drive after the CD is recorded.

● The system records faster than it plays.

If the title information of the track being recordedis stored either in the hard drive or in the CD, thetitle is automatically displayed on the screen. For

WHA0955 WHA0956


title acquisition from the hard-disk drive, musicrecognition technology and related data are pro-vided by Gracenote�.

To view the details of the track, touch the “Text”key on the screen or use the NISSAN controllerand press the ENTER button. The track name andalbum title are displayed on the screen.

If a track is not recorded successfully due toskipping sounds, the symbol is displayedbehind the track number.

The Music Box audio system cannot performrecording under the following conditions:

● There is not enough space in the hard drive.

● The number of albums reaches the maximumof 500.

● The number of tracks reaches the maximumof 3,000.

Automatic recording:

If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned toON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. Formore information, see “Music Box settings” in thissection.

Stopping recording:

To stop the recording, touch the “STOP” key onthe screen. If the CD is ejected, the audio systemis turned off or the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position, the recording also stops.

Playing recorded songsSelect the Music Box audio system by using oneof the following methods:

● Press the mode select switch on the steer-ing wheel.For information, see “Steering wheel switchfor audio control” later in this section.

● Press the MUSIC BOX button.

● Give voice commands.For information, see “NISSAN Voice Recog-nition system” in this section.

WHA0957


Stopping playback:

The system stops playing when:

● Another mode (radio, CD, CompactFlash�or AUX) is selected.

● The audio system is turned off.

● The ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a trackis playing to return to the beginning of the currenttrack. Press the TRACK button while atrack is playing to skip to the beginning of the nexttrack.

If you press and hold the SEEK/CAT (re-wind) button or the TRACK (fast forward)button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds;the track will play while rewinding or fast forward-ing. When the SEEK/CAT (rewind) buttonor the TRACK (fast forward) button is re-leased, the track will return to the normal playingspeed.

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-lect tracks.

For more information on how to use the NISSANcontroller, see “How to use the NISSAN control-ler” earlier in this section.

Play mode selection:

To change to another album or artist, turn theTUNE/FLDR knob.

SCAN·RPT button:

Pressing the SCAN·RPT button while a track isplaying changes the play pattern as follows:

ALL Playlist RPT → 1 Playlist RPT → 1 TRK RPT→ ALL Playlist RDM → 1 Playlist RDM → ALLPlaylist RPT

ALL Playlist RPT: the entire playlist will be re-peated.1 Playlist RPT: the playlist currently being playedwill be repeated.1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will berepeated.ALL Playlist RDM: all the tracks in the playlist willbe played randomly.1 Playlist RDM: the tracks in the current playlistwill be played randomly.

Music Box menu

There are some options available during play-back. Touch the “Menu” key, then select one ofthe following that are displayed on the screen, ifnecessary. Refer to the following information foreach item:

● Play by ArtistPlays songs by an artist whose music iscurrently being played. The artists are sortedin alphabetical order.

● Play by AlbumPlays tracks in each album. The albums aresorted in alphabetical order.

LHA0958


● Play by DatePlays tracks in each album. The albums aresorted in order of the date when they werestored in the system.

● Play by MoodPlays music from one of the followingmoods:

– Relaxing Music

– Lively Music

– Slow Music

– Upbeat Music

● Play by CategoryPlays music from one of the following cat-egories:

– My Favorites

– Hit Songs

– Kids’ Songs

– Rarely Played

● Search ArtistsDisplays a list of artists in alphabetical order.Selecting an artist displays all of the tracksby the artist and starts playing the first track.

● Search AlbumsDisplays a list of albums in order of the datewhen they were stored in the system. Se-lecting an album displays all of the tracks onthe album and starts playing the first track.Touch the “Sort” key to re-sort albums in oneof the following order:

– Rec. (Recorded) Date

– Name

– Release Year

– Artist

WHA1206 LHA0960


● Search Song DetailsSet the conditions and touch the “StartSong Search” key to search for a desiredsong that is stored in the system. The con-ditions are as follows:

– Music Tempo (All, Slow, Normal and Fast)

– Decade (All, ’70s, ’80s, ’90s, ’00s, ’10sand After)

– Group (All, Male Artist, Female Artist,Group and Duo)

– Category (Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B,Hip Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae,Folk, Blues, Country, Metal, Easy Listen-ing, New Age, Soundtrack, Gospel & Re-ligious, World, Classical, Children’s andOther)

● Search KeywordsInput a search keyword using the keypaddisplayed on the screen.For information, see “How to use the touchscreen” earlier in this section.

● Edit AlbumsSelect a category (Rec. (Recorded) Date,Name, Released Year and Artist) and editthe details using the keypad displayed onthe screen.For information, see “How to use the touchscreen” earlier in this section.

● Music Box System Info.Displays the following information about theMusic Box audio system:

– Music Box Used / Free SpaceInformation about Saved Albums, SavedTracks and Remaining Time is displayed.

– Mood CategoriesNumber of saved tracks and their catego-ries (Relaxing Music, Lively Music, SlowMusic, Upbeat Music and Others) aredisplayed.

– Deleted ItemsInformation about the deleted tracks isdisplayed.

– Search Missing TitlesIf titles are not displayed for CDs thathave been recorded, titles can be ac-quired using one of the following meth-ods:

● Retrieve from HDDSearches the title using the database inthe hard drive.

● Retrieve from CFSearches the title from the informationacquired on the Internet.

● Transfer Missing Titles to CFTransfers the information of the album re-corded without titles to a CompactFlash�card. Visit www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/for details.

– Music Box SettingsFor information, see “Music Box settings”later in this section.

– CDDB VersionThe version of the built-in Gracenote�Database is displayed.


Music Box text display:

While listening to a track in the Music Box audiosystem you can view certain text. Touch the “Text”key to display the following information for eachitem:

● Set MoodSet the mood category of the track to “Re-laxing Music”, “Lively Music”, “Slow Music”or “Upbeat Music”.

● Delete TrackDelete the track being played.

● Edit Info.Edit the name of the track being played andits artist using the keypad displayed on thescreen.For information, see “How to use the touchscreen” earlier in this section.The category of the track can also be set toRock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip Hop,Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk, Blues,Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New Age,Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious, World,Classical, Children’s and Others.

● Remove TrackReset the mood setting of a track.

Restoring deleted dataDeleted music data can be restored by perform-ing the following:

1. Touch the “Menu”key and then the touch the“Music Box System Info.” key on the screen.

2. Touch the “Deleted Items” key and then the“Album/Track” key.

3. Touch the “Restore Album/Track” key to re-store the deleted music data.

LHA0961 LHA0962


You can also listen to the beginning of each trackthat has been deleted by performing the follow-ing:

1. Touch the “Menu” key and then the “MusicBox System Info.” key on the screen.

2. Touch the “Deleted Items” key and then the“Play Sample” key.

Music Box settings

To set up the Music Box system to your preferredsettings, touch the “Menu” key during playback,then touch the “Music Box System Info.” key, andthen the “Music Box Settings” key.

● Automatic Recording:When this item is turned to ON, the MusicBox system automatically starts recordingwhen a CD is inserted.

● Recording Quality:Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.

LHA0964 LHA0965 LHA0962


● Title Text Priority:Set the priority to CDDB (Compact DiscData Base) to acquire track information fromthe Gracenote� Database or set to CDTEXT to acquire the information from CDs.

● Delete ALL Music Box Data:Delete all music data stored on the hard-disk.

Gracenote�

NOTE:

● The information contained in theGracenote� Database is not fully guaran-teed.

● The service of the Gracenote� Database onthe Internet may be stopped without priornotice for maintenance.

End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.

Gracenote� MusicID™ Terms of Use

This device contains software from Gracenote,Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). Thesoftware from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft-ware”) enables this application to do online discidentification and obtain music-related informa-tion, including name, artist, track, and title infor-mation (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other func-tions. You may use Gracenote Data only bymeans of the intended End-User functions of thisdevice.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers foryour own personal non-commercial use only. Youagree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit theGracenote Software or any Gracenote Data toany third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTESERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT-TED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to usethe Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio-late these restrictions. If your license terminates,you agree to cease any and all use of theGracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rightsin Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, andthe Gracenote Servers, including all ownershiprights. Under no circumstances will Gracenotebecome liable for any payment to you for anyinformation that you provide. You agree thatGracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under thisAgreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a uniqueidentifier to track queries for statistical purposes.The purpose of a randomly assigned numericidentifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID ser-vice to count queries without knowing anythingabout who you are. For more information, see the

LHA0963


web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy forthe Gracenote MusicID Service.

The Gracenote Software and each item ofGracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”Gracenote makes no representations or warran-ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracyof any Gracenote Data from in the GracenoteServers. Gracenote reserves the right to deletedata from the Gracenote Servers or to changedata categories for any cause that Gracenotedeems sufficient. No warranty is made that theGracenote Software or Gracenote Servers areerror-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.Gracenote is not obligated to provide you withnew enhanced or additional data types or cat-egories that Gracenote may provide in the futureand is free to discontinue its online services atany time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIESEXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT.GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOURUSE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASEWILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM-AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOSTREVENUES.

Copyright:

Music recognition technology and related dataare provided by Gracenote�. Gracenote is theindustry standard in music recognition technol-ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-mation visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. GracenoteSoftware, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote.This product and service may practice one ormore of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend-ing. Some services supplied under license fromOpen Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarksof Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-marks of Gracenote.

CD/CF (CompactFlash�) CARE ANDCLEANING

CD:

● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend thedisc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.

LHA0049


● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

CF cards:

CAUTION

Do not force the CompactFlash� card intothe CompactFlash� player slot. Forcingthe CF card could damage the pins insidethe CF player slot, especially if the CF cardis upside down or backwards.

● Never touch the terminal portion of the Com-pactFlash� cards. Do not bend the cards.

● Always place the cards in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● Do not place heavy objects on the cards.

● Do not store the cards in highly humid loca-tions.

● Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight.

● Do not spill any liquids on the cards.

Refer to the CompactFlash� card Owner’sManual for more details.

LHA1002


1. Volume control switch2. MODE select switch3. POWER on/off switch4. Tuning switch

1. Volume control switch2. Phone operation switch3. POWER on and MODE select switch4. Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using thecontrols on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

If you have the Type A switch, with the ignitionswitch placed in the ACC or ON position, pushthe POWER switch to turn the audio system onor off.

If you have the Type B switch, with the ignitionswitch placed in the ACC or ON position, pushthe MODE switch to turn the audio system on.

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the modein the following sequence: PRESET A → PRE-SET B → PRESET C → Music Box** (if soequipped) → CD* → CompactFlash�* (if soequipped) → DVD* (if so equipped) → AUX***.

*These modes are only available when compat-ible media storage is inserted into the device.

**This mode is only available when music hasbeen downloaded into the Music Box hard-diskdrive audio system.

***This mode is only available when a compatibleauxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down toincrease or decrease the volume.

Type AWHA0611

Type BWHA0612


Tuning

Memory change (radio):

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,

B or C), push the tuning switch orfor less than 1.5 seconds to change to the nextpreset station in memory.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previousradio station.

Next/Previous track (CD/CF):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

This system searches for the blank intervals be-tween selections. If there is a blank interval within1 program or there is no interval between pro-grams, the system may not stop in the desired orexpected location.

Next/Previous track (Music Box):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

Push and hold the tuning switch orfor more than 1.5 seconds to change playlists.When the last playlist is playing, the next playlistwill be selected.

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc upor down. 1. Infrared transmitter lens*

2. Rear display screen*Red transmitters will be visible when infra-red headphones are on.REMOTE AUDIO SYSTEMCONTROLS (if so equipped)Press the REAR CTRL button on the front radiocontrol panel to allow the remote controller tocontrol some audio system functions. Press theREAR CTRL button again to allow the audiosystem to be controlled by only the front controls.

LHA1062


Press the button on the front radio controlpanel; the headphones symbol and the message“Headphones ON” illuminates on the front dis-play when the headphones are on.

One or two infrared headphones and one remotecontroller are included if the vehicle is equippedwith the DVD entertainment system.

For vehicles equipped with the FM/AM/SAT radiowith compact disc player, if the rear headphonesare turned on, the rear speakers will be disabled.The rear passengers can use the wireless head-phones to listen to a different media than the frontpassengers. The rear passengers can listen tothe same media along with the front passengersor they can listen to a different media.

For more information on the remote controller,see “NISSAN Mobile Entertainment System(MES)” later in this section.

VOL (volume) wireless headphones dial:The VOL dial on the wireless headphones allowsthe rear passengers to adjust the headphonevolume level.

Speaker control (front panel) but-ton:

Press the button on the front radio controlpanel to turn the rear speakers off and the wire-less headphones on. Press the buttonagain to turn rear speakers back on and wirelessheadphones off.

MODE (remote control) button:The MODE button on the remote controller al-lows the rear passengers to change betweenPreset A, Preset B, Preset C, Music Box**, CD*,CompactFlash*, DVD* and AUX. When a sourceof media is selected, the media type will be dis-played on the rear screen.

*These modes are only available when compat-ible media storage is inserted into the device.

**This mode is only available when music hasbeen downloaded into the Music Box hard-diskdrive audio system.

Seek (remote control)

buttons:

In AM or FM mode, the or the seekbuttons on the remote controller allow the rearseat passengers to find the next or previouspreset radio station.

In CD, Music Box hard-disk drive audio systemand CompactFlash™ mode, the orthe seek buttons allow the rear passen-gers to find the next or previous selection.

REW and FF (remote con-

trol) buttons:

When the (rewind) or the (fast for-ward) button on the remote controller is pressedwhile in AM or FM mode, the radio will tune to thenext frequency.

When the (rewind) or the (fast for-ward) button on the remote controller is pressedwhile in CD, Music Box hard-disk audio system,or CompactFlash™, the media will play while re-winding or fast forwarding.


ANTENNAWindow antennaThe antenna pattern is printed inside the rearpassenger and driver side windows.

CAUTION

● Do not place metalized film near therear driver or passenger side windowglass or attach any metal parts to it. Thismay cause poor reception or noise.

● When cleaning the inside of the reardriver or passenger side window, becareful not to scratch or damage thewindow antenna. Lightly wipe along theantenna with a dampened soft cloth. This vehicle is equipped with the mobile enter-

tainment system, which enables you to play aDigital Versatile Disc (DVD), providing the im-ages and sounds both in the front and rear dis-play screens.

WARNING

● The driver must not attempt to operateor view the Mobile Entertainment Sys-tem while the vehicle is in motion sothat full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

● Do not attempt to modify the system todisplay a movie on the front screenwhile the vehicle is being driven. Doingso may distract the driver and maycause a collision and serious personalinjury or death.

CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hard orsharp object. If the glass screen breaks,do not touch it. Doing so could result inan injury.

● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaningthe Mobile Entertainment System com-ponents. Do not use solvents or clean-ing solutions.

Do not attempt to use the system in extremetemperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) orabove 158°F (70°C)].

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, do notoperate the system more than 15 minutes withoutstarting the engine.

LHA1019

NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)


Movies will not be shown on the front displaywhile the vehicle is in any drive position to reducedriver distraction. Audio is available when a movieis played. To view movies in the front display, stopthe vehicle in a safe location, move the shiftselector to the P (Park) position and apply theparking brake.

1. EJECT button2. DVD slot3. Auxiliary input jacksDIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYERCONTROLS

1. EJECT button:When the button is pressed with theDVD loaded, it will be ejected.The display will show the eject symbol in theupper left corner of the display for 4 secondsonce the button is pressed.If the DVD is not loaded, the display willshow “NO DISC”.

If the DVD comes out and is not removedwithin 25 seconds, it will be pulled back intothe slot to protect it.

2. DVD slot:Insert a DVD into the slot with the label sidefacing up. The DVD will be guided automati-cally into the slot.

3. Auxiliary input jack:For information, see “DVD auxiliary inputjacks” later in this section.

WHA0967


1. POWER button2. STOP button3. NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and PREVI-

OUS TRACK/CHAPTER button4. TITLE button5. ENTER button

6. DISPLAY button7. MODE button8. SUBTITLE button9. AUDIO button10. ANGLE button11. CLEAR button12. PAUSE button13. PLAY button14. FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE

button15. MENU button16. NAVIGATION keys17. BACK button18. NUMERIC KEYPADREMOTE CONTROLRefer to “Remote control operation” later in thissection for the function of each button.

FLIP-DOWN SCREENThe flip-down screen has a wireless remote controlreceiver �1 located at the bottom of the screen.

CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystal dis-play may break if hit with a hard or sharpobject. If the glass screen breaks, do nottouch it. Doing so could result in an injury.

● The screen rotates down to view and upinto the housing to store when not inuse. Ensure that the screen is latchedsecurely into the housing when stored.

LHA0317

LHA0315


Headphones

Power ON/OFF:

Press the power button to turn the headphoneson or off.

Volume control:

Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol-ume.

The headphones will automatically be turned offin 30 seconds if there is no sound during thatperiod. To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, keep the power supply turned off whennot in use.

NOTE:

For optimum infrared headphone perfor-mance, increase the volume on the rearseat controller to the maximum level andadjust the infrared headphone volume us-ing the volume control on the headphones.Using a lower volume setting on the rearseat controller can cause static noise in theinfrared headphones.

BEFORE OPERATING THE DVDMOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

Precautions

Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-ment system.

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate theDVD System or wear the headphoneswhile the vehicle is in motion so that fullattention may be given to vehicleoperation.

CAUTION

● Only operate the DVD while the vehicleengine is running. Operating the DVDfor extended periods of time with theengine OFF can discharge the vehiclebattery.

● Do not allow the system to get wet.Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-uids may cause the system tomalfunction.

While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD playerdoes not guarantee complete functionality of allVIDEO-CD formats.

SAA0720 SAA0721


Copyright and trademark

● The technology protected by the U.S. patentand other intellectual property rights ownedby Macrovision Corporation and other rightholders is adopted for this system.

● This copyright protected technology cannotbe used without a permit from MacrovisionCorporation. It is limited to be personal use,etc., as long as the permit from MacrovisionCorporation is not issued.

● Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.

● Dolby digital is manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

● Dolby and the double D mark are trademarksof Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

● DTS and DTS Digital Surround are regis-tered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,Inc.

Parental level (parental control)

DVDs with the parental control setting can beplayed with this system. Please use your ownjudgement to set the parental control with thesystem.

Disc selectionYou can play the following disc formats with theDVD drive:

● DVD-VIDEO

● VIDEO-CD

● CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) (CDwith MP3/WMA cannot be played.)

Use DVDs with a region code 1; DVDs withregion code ALL or 1 will operate in the DVDentertainment system. The region code is dis-played as a small symbol printed on the top of theDVD. This vehicle-installed DVD player cannotplay DVDs with a region code other than 1 orALL. Display settings

Front display:

To adjust the front display mode, press the SET-TING button while the DVD is being played,select the “Display”key with the NISSAN control-ler, and then press the ENTER button. To adjustthe display ON/OFF, brightness, tint, color, con-trast and black level, select each key using theNISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.Then you can adjust each item using the NISSANcontroller. After changes have been made pressthe BACK button to save the settings.

WHA0968


Rear display:

To adjust the rear display mode, press the DISP(Display) button on the remote controller.

To adjust the display brightness, tint, color andcontrast, select each key using the joystick on theremote controller and tilt the joystick to the rightor left.

Press the BACK button to apply the settings andreturn to the previous display.

PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILEDISC (DVD)With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passen-gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde-pendently of the front seat.

Press the DISC/AUX button located on the frontcontrols to hear the sound of the DVD playthrough the speakers.

Press the REAR CTRL button located on thefront controls to disable or enable rear seat audiocontrols. For more information on rear seat audiocontrols see “Remote audio system controls” inthis section.

Pressing the button on the front controlsturns the rear speakers on or off and enables ordisables the wireless headphones.

It is possible to operate the DVD player by remotecontrol.

Headphones are a wireless type and no cablesare necessary. You can use them in almost all theranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to usethe headphones in the front seat.)

DISC/AUX button

Park the vehicle in a safe location andapply the parking brake for the front seatoccupants to operate the DVD drive whilewatching the images.

Press the DISC/AUX button on the instrumentpanel and turn the display to the DVD mode.

When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed auto-matically.

The operation screen will be turned on when theDISC/AUX button located on the instrumentpanel is pressed while a DVD is being played,and it will turn off automatically after a period oftime. To turn it on again, press the DISC/AUXbutton once more.

LHA0972


DVD operation keys

To operate the DVD drive, touch the preferred key(if so equipped) or select the preferred key dis-played on the operation screen using theNISSAN controller.

NOTE:

If the display in your vehicle is not touchscreen enabled; use the NISSAN controllerand the ENTER button to operate the fol-lowing functions. For more information onhow to operate the NISSAN controller, see“How to use the NISSAN controller” earlierin this section.

PAUSE key:

Touch the “ ” PAUSE key to pause the DVD.To resume playing the DVD, touch the“ ”PLAY key.

To pause the DVD, it is also possible to pressthe button on the keypad of the remotecontroller.

PLAY key:

Touch the “ ” PLAY key to start playing theDVD, for example, after pausing the DVD.

To start playing the DVD, it is also possible topress the button on the keypad of theremote controller.

STOP key:

Touch the “ ” STOP key to stop playing theDVD.

To stop playing the DVD, it is also possible topress the button on the keypad of theremote controller.

SKIP (forward) key:

Touch the “ ” SKIP key to skip the chapter(s)of the disc forward. The chapters will advance thenumber of times the “ ” SKIP key is touched.

Touch and hold the “ ” SKIP key for morethan 1.5 seconds to fast forward the disc. Whenthe “ ” SKIP key is released, the disc will beplayed normally.

To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also possibleto press the button on the keypad of theremote controller.

SKIP (rewind) key:

Touch the “ ”SKIP key to skip the chapter(s)of the disc backward. The chapters will go backthe number of times the “ ” SKIP key istouched.

Touch and hold the “ ” SKIP key for morethan 1.5 seconds to rewind the disc. When the“ ” SKIP key is released, the disc will beplayed normally.

To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is also pos-sible to press the button on the keypad ofthe remote controller.


DVD settingsTouch the “Settings” key to adjust the followingsettings while playing a DVD.

When all the changes have been made, pressBACK button to save all the settings.

LHA0969 LHA0970 LHA0971


Switch to DVD-AUX:

Switch the output source from the DVD drive toanother device connected to the auxiliary inputjacks located on the DVD player.

For more information, see “DVD auxiliary inputjacks” later in this section.

Menu:

Some menus specific to each DVD will beshown. For details, see the instructions attachedto the DVD.

Top Menu:

Each title menu in the disc will be shown. Fordetails, see the instructions attached to the DVD.

Audio:

Some audio tracks specific to each DVD will beshown. For details, see the instructions attachedto the DVD.

Subtitle:

Choose the preferred DVD subtitle language by

touching the “ ” key or the “ ” key.

Display Mode:

Choose from the Full, Wide, Normal or Cinema

mode by touching the “ ” key or the “ ”key.

Angle:

If the DVD contains different angles (such asmoving images), the current image angle can beswitched to another one.

Choose a different angle by touching the “–” keyor the “+” key; the angle will change if available.

Angle Mark:

When this item is turned on, an angle mark will beshown on the bottom of the screen if the scenecan be seen from a different angle. Touch the“ON” key to enable the angle mark; the indicatorlight will illuminate.

10Key Search:

Touch the “10Key Search” key to open the num-ber entry screen. Input the number you want tosearch for and touch the “OK” key. The specifiedTitle/Chapter or Group/Track will be played.

Title Search:

The scene with the specified title will be dis-played the number of times the “–” key or the “+”key is touched.

Menu Skip:

DVD menus are automatically configured and thecontents will be played directly when the “MenuSkip” key is turned on. Note that some discs maynot be played directly even if this item is turned on.

DVD Language:

Touch the “DVD Language” key to open the num-ber entry screen. Input the number correspond-ing to the preferred language and touch the “OK”key. The DVD top menu language will bechanged to the one specified.

DRC:

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows youto tune the dynamic range of the sound recordedin the Dolby� Digital format. Touch the “–” key orthe “+” key to tune the DRC.

DVD auxiliary input jacks

The auxiliary input jacks are located on the front ofthe DVD player, which is located inside the cen-ter console. NTSC and PAL compatible devicessuch as video games, camcorders and portablevideo players can be connected to the auxiliaryjacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-tion purposes.

● Yellow - video input

● White - left channel audio input

● Red - right channel audio input

Before connecting a device to a jack, power offthe portable device and turn off the DVD player.


To view something connected to the auxiliaryinput jacks, press the DISC/AUX button until theDVD mode appears, then touch the “Settings”key. Then touch the “Switch to DVD-AUX” key.The screen will change to the DVD-AUX mode.

DVD-AUX settings

Touch the “Settings” key to adjust the followingsettings:

● Switch to DVD:Touch this key to switch back to the DVDmode.

● Video Format:If the auxiliary source is in a different video

format, touch the “ ” key or the “ ”key and the video format will change.

● Display Mode:Choose from the Full, Wide, Normal or Cin-ema mode by touching the “ ” key orthe “ ” key.

When all the changes have been made, press theBACK button to save all the settings.

LHA0973 LHA0974


REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION

For all operation precautions, see “Before oper-ating the DVD Mobile Entertainment System”earlier in this section.

The DVD system can also be controlled by usingthe remote controller in the rear seats. See thefollowing items.

PWR on/off button:

With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ONposition, press the PWR button to turn the DVDrear display on or off.

NOTE:

The PWR button on the remote control onlyturns the rear display on or off.

Insert the DVD into the slot with the label sidefacing up. The DVD will be guided automaticallyinto the slot.

If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, theDVD player will automatically turn on.

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc into theslot. This could damage the player.

MODE select button:

Press the MODE button to select Audio/Videosource between DVD and AUX input (input jackson the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input,White = left channel audio input, and Yellow =Video input).

The display will show the “AUX” in the upper leftcorner of the display for 4 seconds once theMode is changed to AUX.

To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary inputjacks” in this section.

PLAY:

When the PLAY button on the remotecontrol is pressed, the player will play.

In play mode, the display will briefly showon the upper left corner of the display.

FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Rewind):

Press the (fast forward) / (rewind)buttons to carry out the fast forward or rewindpresentation at 5 times normal play speed.

Press the (fast forward) / (rewind)buttons again or PLAY button to resume thenormal play speed.

NEXT

CHAPTER/PREVIOUS

CHAPTER:

When the (NEXT CHAPTER) button ispressed while the DVD is playing, the programnext to the present one will start to play from itsbeginning. Press several times to skip throughprograms. The DVD will advance the number oftimes the button is pressed. When the(PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button is pressed, theprogram being played returns to its beginning.Press several times to skip back through pro-grams. The DVD will go back the number of timesthe button is pressed.

PAUSE:

When the PAUSE button on the remotecontrol is pressed, the player will pause playing ofthe media. In pause mode, the player willshow on the upper left corner of the dis-play until the player is changed to another mode.


STOP:

Press the STOP button once to stop playing themedia. The display will show in the upperleft corner of the display for 4 seconds, and thelast disc position will be stored. When the PLAYbutton is pressed again, it will resume at thestored disc track and time position.

If the STOP button is pressed again when theplayer is already in Stop mode, it will reinitializethe pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect,it will ignore the last stored disc position andupon receipt of the next play message, will beginat the Title Menu or at “the beginning of the disc”.

DISPLAY:

If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2seconds, the display menu will appear on thescreen.

● The display menu will remain on the screenfor 10 seconds if no subsequent controlactivations occur.

● Use the NAVIGATION KEYS to navigatewithin the display menu and use ENTER toselect the item.

NAVIGATION KEYS:

If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVI-GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,Down, Left, and Right within the menu.

If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATIONKEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,and Right within the menu.

ENTER:

In MENU mode, press the ENTER button to se-lect MENU items.

In the display menu, press the ENTER button toselect items for modification, as per the on-screen instructions.

MENU:

If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENUbutton is pressed, the DVD menu will appear onthe screen. Use the Navigation Keys to navigatewithin the menu and use ENTER to select theitem.

Press the MENU button again to return to PLAYmode.

TITLE:

Press the TITLE button to return the DVD mediato the “title” of the DVD.

Press the TITLE button again to return to theprevious stop point and play.

BACK:

Press the BACK button to exit the current activemenu and return to the previous menu.

SUBTITLE:

Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitleselection menu.

Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cyclethrough each available subtitle.

AUDIO:

Press the AUDIO button to call up the audiomenu.

Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cyclethrough each available audio track.

ANGLE:

Press the ANGLE button to call up the cameraangle menu.

Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cyclethrough each available angle.

CLEAR:

Press the CLEAR button to clear all numericinputs, if actuated prior to expiration of the3-second timer.


NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10):

Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly accessdisc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting theirnumeric value.

Use the “≥10” button to input numbers greaterthan or equal to 10. Up to 3 digits can be inputtedwhen selecting the chapter/title/track number.

The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons willcontinuously shift the previously input number tothe “left”.

The chapter/title/track number will be automati-cally selected (if valid, based on media content) if3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs.

The operator can cancel the inputchapter/title/track number by actuating theCLEAR control prior to the expiration of the3-second timer.

These functions can be used only for the DVDdiscs which correspond to them.

CARE AND MAINTENANCEUse a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean thesurfaces of your NISSAN Mobile EntertainmentSystem (DVD player face, screen, remote control,etc.).

Do not attempt to use the system in extremetemperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) orabove 158°F (70°C)].

Do not attempt to operate the system in extremehumidity conditions (less than 10% or more than75%).

CAUTION

● Do not use any solvents or cleaningsolutions when cleaning the videosystem.

● Do not use excessive force on the moni-tor screen.

● Avoid touching or scratching the moni-tor screen as it may become dirty ordamaged.

HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD

CAUTION

● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touchthe surface of the disc.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface fromthe center to the outer edge using aclean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the discusing a circular motion.

● Do not use a conventional recordcleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in-tended for industrial use.

LHA0049


● A new disc may be rough on its innerand outer edges. Remove the roughedges using the side of a pen or pencilas illustrated.

● Never attempt to use a DVD that hasbeen cracked, deformed, or repairedusing adhesive. Doing so may causedamage to the equipment.

● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami-nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may notbe read properly.

● Do not write, draw or attach anything on anyside of the DVD.

● Do not store the DVD in locations with directsunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.

● Always place discs in the storage case whenthey are not being used.

● Do not put on any sticker or write anythingon either surface of the DVD.

DVD player operation precautions

Do not use the following DVDs as they maycause the DVD player to malfunction:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter.

● DVDs with a region code other than“1”. The region code �A is displayed ina small symbol printed on the top ofthe DVD �B .

● DVDs that are not round.

● DVDs with a paper label.

● DVDs that are warped, scratched, orhave unequal edges.

● Recordable digital video discs(DVD+R).

● Rewritable digital video discs(DVD+RW).

If a DVD with a paper label is used andbecomes jammed, you may be able to resetthe unit and eject the jammed disc with thefollowing procedure:

1. Record the radio presets.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal fromthe battery for five minutes.

3. Reconnect the negative battery termi-nal.

4. Check to see if the jammed DVD hasbeen ejected. If it has not, try to ejectthe DVD by pushing the eject button.

LHA0484


5. If the disc cannot be ejected see yourNISSAN dealer for further assistance.

6. Re-program the radio presets.

Remote control and headphonesbattery replacement

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid.

2. Replace batteries with new ones.

● Size AA (remote control)

● Size AAA (headphones)

Make sure that the and ends onthe batteries match the markings inside thecompartment.

3. Close the lid securely.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, close the lid se-curely.

● If you will not be using the remote control forlong periods of time, remove the batteries.

● Replacement of the batteries is neededwhen the remote control only functions atextremely close distances to the DVD playeror not at all.

● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.

● An improperly disposed battery can harmthe environment. Always confirm local regu-lations for battery disposal.

LHA0318 SAA0723


● When changing batteries, do not let dust oroil get on the remote control and head-phones.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment. This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) This de-vice may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation of thedevice.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingprecautions; otherwise, the new equipment mayadversely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedfor any purpose while driving so fullattention may be given to vehicle op-eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit theuse of cellular telephones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while talking onthe phone, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not ground electrical accessoriesdirectly to the battery terminal. Doingso will bypass the variable voltage con-trol system and the vehicle battery maynot charge completely. Refer to “Vari-able voltage control system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion later in this manual.

● Use electrical accessories with the en-gine running to avoid discharging thevehicle battery.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO


WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.


CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-patible Bluetooth� enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With Bluetooth� wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

WHA0975

BLUETOOTH� HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)


module when the ignition switch is placed in theON position with the paired cellular phone turnedon and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth�cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

Before using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acompatible cellular phone and the in-vehiclephone module before using the hands-freephone system.

● Some Bluetooth� enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and pairing.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive a cellular signal; suchas in a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe Bluetooth� wireless connection, the bat-tery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”in this section. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manualregarding the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only thesupplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,modification, or attachments could damagethe transmitter and may violate FCC regula-tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,including interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.


BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.and licensed to Vis-teon.

USING THE SYSTEMThe NISSAN Voice Recognition system allowshands-free operation of the Bluetooth� PhoneSystem.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands maynot be available so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

InitializationWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. If the button ispressed before the initialization completes, thesystem will announce “Hands-free phone systemnot ready” and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSANVoice Recognition system, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminatesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing voice commands correctly.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking acommand. Otherwise, the command will notbe received properly.

● Start speaking a command within 5 secondsafter the tone sounds.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

Giving voice commandsTo operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, pressand release the button located on thesteering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak acommand.

The command given is picked up by the micro-phone, and voice feedback is given when thecommand is accepted.

● If you need to hear the available commandsfor the current menu again, say “Help” andthe system will repeat them.

● If a command is not recognized, the systemannounces, “Command not recognized.Please try again.” Repeat the command in aclear voice.

● If you want to go back to the previous com-mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-tion” any time the system is waiting for aresponse.

● You can cancel a command when the sys-tem is waiting for a response by saying,“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You canalso press the button on the steeringwheel at any time. Whenever the VR sessionis cancelled, a double beep is played toindicate you have exited the system.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voicefeedback, press the volume control switches(+ or -) on the steering wheel while beingprovided with feedback. You can also usethe radio volume control knob.

● In most cases you can interrupt the voicefeedback to speak the next command bypressing the button on the steeringwheel.


● To speed the operation you can say multiplecommands. For example, press thebutton then say “Phonebook, New entry”rather than “Phonebook.” Wait for the voicefeedback prompt then say “New entry”.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certainway to speak numbers in voice commands. Referto the following rules and examples.

● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two ohoh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two ohoh”

● Words can be used for the first 4 digitsplaces only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two ohoh”,

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixtytwo hundred, and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty twohundred.

● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.The system will prompt you to continue en-tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six two zero zero”

● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-able when using the “Call International”command and the “Send” command duringa call).

● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when usingthe “Call International” command).

● Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (availableonly when storing a phone book number).

● You can say “star” for “*” and “pound” for “#”at any time in any position of the phonenumber (available only when using “Call In-ternational” command).

See “List of voice commands” and “Interna-tional” in this section for more information.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two starone two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers assingle digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at anytime. Please use the “Help” command to getinformation on how to use the system.


CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steeringwheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate a VRsession or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button toskip through system feedback and toenter commands during a call. See “Listof voice commands” and “During a call”later in this section for more information.

PHONE/END

Press the button to cancel a VRsession or end a call.

GETTING STARTEDThe following procedures will help you getstarted using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-ditional command options, refer to “List of voicecommands” in this section.

Choosing a languageYou can interact with the Bluetooth� Hands-FreePhone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see“Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” later in thissection.

4. The system announces the current languageand gives you the option to change the lan-guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (inFrench). Use the following chart to selectthe language.

NOTE:

You must press the button orthe button within 5 seconds tochange the language.

Currentlanguage

Press

(PHONE/SEND)to select

Press

(PHONE/END)to select

English Spanish FrenchSpanish English FrenchFrench English Spanish

5. If you decide not to change the language, donot press either button. After 5 seconds, theVR session will end, and the language willnot be changed.

LHA1020


Pairing procedure

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Setup” �A

“Pair phone” �B

“New phone” �C

Initiate from handset �D

Name phone �E

Assign priority �F

Choose ringtone �G

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. The system announces the availablecommands.

2. Say: “Setup” �A . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone” �B . The system acknowl-edges the command and announces thenext set of available commands.

4. Say: “New phone” �C . The system acknowl-edges the command and asks you to initiatepairing from the phone handset �D .

The pairing procedure of the cellular phonevaries according to each cellular phonemodel. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel-lular phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN andcannot be changed.

5. The system asks you to say a name for thephone �E .

If the name is too long or too short, thesystem tells you, then prompts you for aname again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired andthe name sounds too much like a namealready used, the system tells you, thenprompts you for a name again.

6. The system asks you to assign a priority level�F . The priority level determines whichphone is active when more than one pairedBluetooth� phone is in the vehicle. Followthe instructions provided by the system or

refer to “Setup” later in this section for moreinformation on changing priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to selecta custom ring tone �G . Follow the instruc-tions provided by the system or refer to“Setup” later in this section for more infor-mation on selecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phonenumber

Main Menu

“Call” �A

Number (speak digits) �B

“Dial” �C

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” �A . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

Say: “Call International” to dial more than 10digits or any special characters.

3. Say the number you wish to call starting withthe area code in single digit format �B . If thesystem has trouble recognizing the correctphone number, try entering the number inthe following groups: 3-digit area code,


3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “fivefive five” as the 1st group, then “one twoone” as the 2nd group, and “three three fivefour” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than10 digits or any special characters, say “In-ternational”. See “How to say numbers” inthis section, for more information.

4. When you have finished speaking the phonenumber, the system repeats it back and an-nounces the available commands.

5. Say: “Dial” �C . The system acknowledgesthe command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when youhear the ring tone, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call” or “Call International”

“Phone Book”

“Memo Pad”

“Setup”

When you press and release the button onthe steering wheel, you can choose from thecommands on the Main Menu. The followingpages describe these commands and the com-mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone beforespeaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commandscurrently available any time the system is waitingfor a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time thesystem is waiting for a response. The system willend the VR session. Whenever the VR session iscancelled, a double beep is played to indicateyou have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any timethe system is waiting for a response.

When you get used to the menus in the system,you can talk ahead by saying more than onecommand at a time. For example, say, “Call fivefive five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”

Also, when you get used to the system re-sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone bypressing the button on the steering wheel.However, if you press the button when thesystem is waiting for a response from you it willend the VR session.

“Call”

Main Menu

“Call” or “Call International”

Name (speak name) �A


“Redial” �C

“Call Back” �D

Name (speak name) �A

If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, youcan dial a number associated with a name andlocation.


See “Phone book” later in this section to learnhow to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe phone book entry you wish to call. The systemacknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with thename, the system asks you to choose the loca-tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,the system begins the call.


When prompted by the system, say the numberyou wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”and “Making a call by entering a phone number”in this section for more details.

“Redial” �C

Use the Redial command to call the last numberthat was dialed within the vehicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last numberdialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to redial” andends the VR session.

“Call back” �D

Use the Call Back command to dial the number ofthe last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to call back”andends the VR session.

International

For dialing more than 10 digits or any specialcharacters, please say “international”. When thesystem acknowledges the command, the systemwill prompt you to speak the number.

During a call

During a call there are several command optionsavailable. Press the button on the steeringwheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-mands.

● “Help” — The system announces the avail-able commands.

● “Go back/Correction” — The system an-nounces “Go back,” ends the VR sessionand returns to the call.

● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returnsto the call.

● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Sendcommand to enter numbers, “*” or “#” duringa call. For example, if you were directed todial an extension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the commandand sends the tones associated with thenumbers. The system then ends the VR ses-sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,Say “pound” for “#”.

● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System to the cellularphone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Calltransferred to privacy mode.” The systemthen ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call com-mand again to return to a hands-free callthrough the vehicle.

● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to muteyour voice so the other party cannot hear it.Use the mute command again to unmuteyour voice.


NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phonenetwork connection is lost while the Mutefeature is on, the Mute feature will be resetto “off” for the next call so the other partycan hear your voice.

“Phone book”

NOTE:

Phone book commands are not availablewhen the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phone Book”

“New Entry” �A

“Edit” �B

“Delete” �C

“List Names” �D

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for eachphone paired with the system. Each name canhave up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ-ated with it.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected withPhone B.

“New entry” �A

Use the New Entry command to store a newname in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name youwould like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”If the name is too long or too short, the systemtells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a namealready stored, the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and youconfirm it is correct, the system asks for a location(Home, Office, Mobile or Other).

For example, say: “Home.”The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number orto transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”See “How to say numbers” in this section formore information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the Bluetooth� communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers or transferring an entry, choose“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber. The system then asks if you would like tostore another location for the same name. If youdo not wish to store another location, the systemends the VR session.


“Edit” �B

Use the Edit command to alter an existing phonebook entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phonenumber to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and asksyou for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location.

The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number orto transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”See “How to say numbers” in this section formore information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the Bluetooth� communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber, then announces that the entry has beenstored. The system then ends the VR session.

“Delete” �C

Use the Delete command to erase one entry fromthe phone book, all entries from the phone book,the current redial number or the current call backnumber.

To delete entries from the phone book, say aname or “All entries” when prompted by the sys-tem.

The system acknowledges the command andasks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call backnumber, say “redial number” or “call back num-ber” when prompted by the system.

If a redial number or a call back number exists, thesystem deletes them without asking for confirma-tion.

If there is no number for the entry you are trying todelete, the system says so and ends the VRsession.

“List names” �D

Use the List Names command to hear all thenames and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries butdoes not include the actual phone numbers.When the playback of the list is complete, thesystem goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any timeby pressing the button on the steeringwheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Memo pad”

Main Menu

“Memo Pad”

“Record” �A

“Play” �B

“Delete” �C

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voicememos, each up to 20 seconds long.


“Record” �A

The system announces “Recording” and a tonesounds, signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record clearly.

When you are done, press the orbutton on the steering wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to endthe VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wishto record over the oldest memo.

“Play” �B

The system plays back all the memos in the orderof newest to oldest. The system ends the VRsession.

If there are no memos recorded, the system an-nounces “No messages to play.” The systemends the VR session.

“Delete” �C

The Delete command erases all memos. Thesystem asks you to confirm this action beforedeleting all memos.

“Setup”

Main Menu

“Setup”

“Pair Phone” �A

“List Phone” �B

“Select Phone” �C

“Change Priority” �D

“Delete Phone” �E

“Select Ringtone” �F

“Bluetooth Off” �G

Use the Setup command to change options as-sociated with the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem.

“Pair phone” �A

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a compat-ible phone to the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem.

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled. Also, see“Pairing procedure” in this section for ad-ditional information.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair asixth phone, the system announces that you mustfirst delete one phone or replace an existingphone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already beenpaired to your vehicle’s system, the system an-nounces the name the phone is already using.The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choose from thefollowing commands:

● “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing proce-dure” in this section.

● “Replace phone” — The system announcesthe names of the phones already paired andasks which you would like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phone youwish to replace, the pairing procedure willbegin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” in thissection.

● “List phone” – See the description below.

“List phone” �B

Use the List Phone command to hear the namesof the phones currently paired. If no phones arepaired, the system announces, “No pairedphones to list.” The system then ends the VRsession.


“Select phone” �C

Use the Select Phone command to select aphone of lesser priority when two or more phonespaired with Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem are in the vehicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phone andconfirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selectedphone remains active until the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position or you select a newphone.

“Change priority” �D

Use the Change Priority command to change thepriority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone is ac-tive when more than one paired Bluetooth�phone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the activephone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4,5).

If the new priority level is already being used foranother phone, the two phones will swap prioritylevels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone APriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone C toLevel 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone CPriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete phone” �E

Use the Delete Phone command to delete aspecific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phonesalready paired with the system and their prioritylevel. The system then gives you the option todelete a specific phone, all phones or listen to thelist again.

Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones,the system asks you to confirm this action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associatedphone book for that phone will also bedeleted.

“Select ringtone” �F

Use the Select Ringtone command to select thetone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call isreceived.

The system announces the name of the activephone and asks you to choose from the followingcommands:

● “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtoneand asks if you would like to select that tone.If you say “No”, the system plays the nextringtone available and continues to cyclethrough the ringtones until you select one orquit.

● “Silent” — The system asks you to confirmyour wish to disable the ringtone.

“Bluetooth off” �G

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off theBluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System.

When the Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem is off, you will not be able to make or receivecalls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, youwill not have access to the Phone Book.

You can still use the Memo Pad and accessSetup.


SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect users to train the system to improve rec-ognition accuracy. By repeating a number ofcommands, the users can create a voice model oftheir own voice that is stored in the system. Thesystem is capable of storing a different speakeradaptation model for memory A and memory B.

If memory A is available, the system will usememory A to store the model. If memory A is inuse and memory B is available, the system willuse memory B to store the model. If both of thememory locations are in use, the system will askthe user to select which memory location shouldbe overwritten.

Training procedureThe procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quietoutdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for the

hands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different lan-guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier inthis section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selectedautomatically. If both memory locations arealready in use, the system will prompt you tooverwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you areready to begin, press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow theinstructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tellyou an adequate number of phrases havebeen recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say your name.Follow the instructions to register yourname.

11. The system will announce that speaker ad-aptation has been completed and the sys-tem is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

● The button is pressed for more than 5seconds in SA mode.

● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF orLOCK position.

Training phrasesDuring the SA mode, the system instructs thetrainer to say the following phrases. (The systemwill prompt you for each phrase.)

● phone book new entry

● dial three oh four two nine

● delete call back number

● setup pair phone

● memo pad play

● eight pause nine three two pause seven

● delete all entries

● call seven two four zero nine

● phone book delete entry

● memo pad record

● dial star two one seven oh

● Yes


● No

● select ring tone

● dial eight five six nine two

● Bluetooth on

● setup change priority

● call three one nine oh two

● nine seven pause pause three oh eight

● Cancel

● call back number

● call star two zero nine five

● delete phone

● dial eight three zero five one

● Home

● four three pause two nine pause zero

● delete redial number

● phone book list names

● call eight oh five four one

● Correction

● setup change ring tone

● dial seven four oh one eight

● setup main menu

● Delete

● dial nine seven two six six

● memo pad delete

● call seven six three oh one

● go back

● call five six two eight zero

● dial six six four three seven


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number 1, untilthe problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is toonoisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from thephone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed byusing the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” in this section.2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.


WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.


CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-patible Bluetooth� enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With Bluetooth� wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

WHA0977

BLUETOOTH� HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM(if so equipped)


module when the ignition switch is turned to theON position with the paired cellular phone turnedon and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth�cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports thephone commands, so dialing a phone numberusing your voice is possible. For more details, see“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this sec-tion.

Before using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acellular phone and the in-vehicle phonemodule before using the hands-free phonesystem.

● Some Bluetooth� enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and pairing.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive cellular signal; such asin a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Immediately after the ignition switch ispushed to the ON position or the DVD-ROMfor the navigation system is inserted into theplayer, it may be impossible to receive a callfor a short period of time.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe Bluetooth� wireless connection, the bat-tery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”later in this section. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manualregarding the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

● The signal strength display on the monitorwill not coincide with the signal strengthdisplay of some cellular phones.

● If reception between callers is unclear, ad-justing the incoming or outgoing call volumemay improve the clarity. See “Call volume”later in this section.

REGULATORY INFORMATIONFCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC’sRF exposure guidelines, use only the suppliedantenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, orattachments could damage the transmitter andmay violate FCC regulations.


– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,including interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.and licensed to Xa-navi InformaticsCorporation.

VOICE COMMANDSYou can use voice commands to operate variousBluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System featuresusing the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. Formore details, see “NISSAN Voice RecognitionSystem” in this section.

PAIRING PROCEDURE

1. Press the PHONE button on the instrumentpanel or the switch on the steeringwheel, and select the “Pair phone” key onthe display using the NISSAN controller.Then press the ENTER button.

LSU0001


NOTE:

If a phone is already paired with the sys-tem, Step 1 will not work. To pair anotherphone, press the SETTING button, then se-lect the “Phone” key and press the ENTERbutton. Scroll to the bottom of the list andselect the “Bluetooth Setup” key and pressthe ENTER button. Select the “Pair Phone”key, and press the ENTER button then fol-low the instructions in Step 2.

2. Select the “None (Add New)” key from thename list of the phones, and press the EN-TER button.

3. When a PIN code appears on the screen,operate the Bluetooth� cellular phone toenter the PIN code.

The pairing procedure of the cellular phonevaries according to each cellular phone. Seethe cellular phone Owner’s Manual for de-tails. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call theNISSAN Consumer Affairs Department forinstructions on pairing recommended cellu-lar phones.

When the pairing is complete, the screenwill return to the Bluetooth� setup display.

LSU0002 LSU0003


PHONEBOOK

Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in thephonebook.

1. Press the SETTING button, then select the“Phone” key and press the ENTER button.

2. Select the “Phonebook” key and press theENTER button.

3. Select one of the “None (Add New)” keysfrom the name list of the phonebook andpress the ENTER button.

4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key inorder to transfer a phonebook entry fromyour cellular phone to your phonebook inyour car.

5. Operate the cellular phone to send a per-son’s name and phone number from thememory of the cellular phone. The memorysending procedure from the cellular phonevaries according to each cellular phonemanufacturer. See the cellular phone own-er’s manual for more details.

6. After the download is registered in thephonebook, the system will ask if you want toadd a voicetag for it. The voicetag screen willbe displayed.

If you want to add a voicetag select the “Yes”key and press the ENTER button. For ex-ample, if the person’s name is David, speak“David” while the Store voicetag screen ison the display. The David voicetag is storedin the phonebook. Voicetag is a useful func-tion for easy dialing supported by the VoiceRecognition system. For more information,see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” inthis section.

LHA0978 LHA0983 LHA0984


7. When the phonebook download is com-pleted, the screen will return to the name listof the phonebook.

There are different methods to input a phonenumber. Select one of the following options forStep 4 above.

Enter Data by Keypad:Input the name and phone number manually us-ing the keypad displayed on the screen. For in-formation on how to use the touch screen, see“How to use the touch screen” earlier in thissection.

Copy from Downloaded Phonebook:Copy a phonebook from the Bluetooth� cellularphone. The availability of this function dependson each cellular phone. The copying procedurefrom the cellular phone also varies according toeach cellular phone. See the cellular phone own-er’s manual for more details.

Copy from Outgoing Call Logs:Store the name and phone number from theoutgoing call list.

Copy from Incoming Call Logs:Store the name and phone number from theincoming call list.

Transfer via Bluetooth:Transfer a contact from the Bluetooth� cellularphone. Availability of this function depends oneach cellular phone. The transferring procedurefrom the cellular phone also varies according toeach cellular phone. See the cellular phone own-er’s manual for more details.

Delete:Delete a contact that is registered in the phone-book.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the PHONE button on the instrumentpanel or the switch on the steeringwheel. The “Phone” screen will appear onthe display.

2. Select the “Call (Phonebook)” key on the“Phone” menu and press the ENTER button.

3. Select the registered person’s name fromthe list and press the ENTER button. Dialingwill start and the screen will change to theCall in Progress screen.

LSU0007 LSU0078


4. After the call is over, perform one of thefollowing to finish the call:

a. Select the “Hang up” key on the Call inProgress screen and press the ENTERbutton.

b. Press the switch on the steeringwheel.

c. When the Call in Progress screen is dis-played, press the PHONE button on theinstrument panel to hang up. If any otherscreen is currently displayed, press thePHONE button to display the Call in Prog-ress screen first, then press the PHONEbutton again to hang up.

There are different methods to make a call. Selectone of the following options instead of “Call(Phonebook)” in Step 2 above.

● Redial:

Dial the previously dialed number again.

● Call (Call Logs):

Select the name or phone number from theincoming or outgoing call logs.

● Call (Downloaded):

Select the name or phone number from thedownloaded cellular phonebook.

● Dial (Keypad):

Input the phone number manually using thekeypad displayed on the screen. For infor-mation on how to use the touch screen, see“How to use the touch screen” earlier in thissection.

RECEIVING A CALLWhen you hear a phone ring, the display willchange to phone mode. To receive a call, followone of the procedures listed below:

a. Touch the “Answer” key on the display.

b. Press the PHONE button on the instrumentpanel.

c. Press the phone button on the steeringwheel switches.

LHA0987


There are some options available when receivinga call. Select one of the following displayed onthe screen.

Answer:Accept an incoming call to talk.

On Hold:Put an incoming call on hold.

Reject Call:Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, follow one of the procedureslisted below:

a. Touch the “Reject Call” key on the display.

b. Press the PHONE button on the instrumentpanel.

c. Press and hold the phone button on thesteering wheel switches.

DURING A CALL

There are some options available during a call.Select one of the following displayed on thescreen, if necessary:

Hang up:Finish the call.

Use Handset:Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

Mute:Mute your voice to the person.

Keypad:Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.For example, entering your PIN number for voice-mail.

NOTE:

Pushing the TALK switch on thesteering wheel during a call allows num-bers and digits to be sent using Voice Rec-ognition.

Cancel Mute:This will appear after the “Mute” key is touched.Mute will be cancelled.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder orquieter, press the volume control switch locatedon the steering wheel switches or turn the volumecontrol knob on the instrument panel while talkingon the phone. This adjustment is also available inthe SETTING mode.

LHA0988


ENDING A CALL

To finish the call, perform one of the followingprocedures:

● Select the “Hang up” key on the Call inProgress display and press the ENTER but-ton.

● Push the switch on the steeringwheel.

● When the Call in Progress screen is dis-played, press the PHONE button on theinstrument panel to hang up. If any otherscreen is currently displayed, press thePHONE button to display the Call in Prog-ress screen first, then press the PHONEbutton again to hang up.

PHONE SETTING

To set up the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem to your preferred settings, press the SET-TING button on the instrument panel and selectthe “Phone” key on the display, then press theENTER button.

Phonebook:See “Phonebook” earlier in this section for add-ing, editing and deleting a contact.

Downloaded Phonebook:See the following information for each item.

LSU0009 LHA0978


● Download All:Download all of the contacts registered inthe Bluetooth� cellular phone. Availability ofthis function depends on each cellularphone. The memory downloading procedurefrom the cellular phone also varies accordingto each cellular phone. See your cellularphone Owner’s Manual for more details.

● Delete Downloaded Phonebook:Delete all of the downloaded phonebookentries.

● Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone-book:Delete a single entry from the downloadedphonebook. Touch the corresponding letterkey, then touch the name key you wish todelete. Touch the “Yes” key to delete theentry.

Automatic Hold:If this item is turned on, an incoming call will beplaced on hold automatically after several rings.

Use Vehicle Ringtone:If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that isdifferent from the cellular phone’s will soundwhen receiving a call.

Delete Call Logs:Delete all the outgoing or incoming call logs fromthe list.

Bluetooth Setup:See the following information for each item.

● Bluetooth:If this item is turned off, the connection be-tween the cellular phone and the in-vehiclephone module will be canceled.

● Bluetooth Info.:Check information about the device name,vehicle name, device address, device PINand connection status.

● Pair Phone:See “Pairing Procedure” in this section.

LHA0979 LHA0980


● Priority ChangeIf multiple phones are registered to the sys-tem, you can change the priority of thephones on the shown list. The system showsthe priority level of each phone. Selectphone to change priority. Then, select an-other phone to swap priority levels.

● Remove Paired Phone:Delete a registered cellular phone from thepaired list.

● Paired Phone List:Up to 5 registered cellular phones areshown on the list. If you select a cellularphone that is different from the one currentlybeing connected, the newly selected phonewill be connected to the system.

● Edit Phone Name:If you would like to change the way yourphone’s name is displayed, select this key; acharacter input screen will be displayed.

CALL VOLUME

Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volumemay improve clarity if reception between callers isunclear.

● Incoming call — adjusting this setting allowsyou to hear a difference in volume.

● Outgoing call — adjusting this setting allowsthe person you are talking with to hear adifference in volume.

To access the settings, press the SETTING but-ton, then highlight “Volume and Beeps” using theNISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.

LHA0989 LSU0083


You can also adjust the volume of an incomingvoice during a call by pushing the volume controlswitch on the steering wheel or by turning thevolume control knob on the instrument panel.

NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-freeoperation of the systems equipped on this ve-hicle, such as phone and vehicle information.

There are two voice recognition modes of opera-tion available. They are:

● Standard Mode

● Alternate Command Mode

In Standard Mode (the factory default setting),commands that are available are always shownon the display and announced by the system. Youcan complete your desired operation by simplyfollowing the prompts given by the system. In thismode, hands-free operation of Audio ClimateControl and Display is not available throughNISSAN Voice Recognition.

For advanced operation, you can change to anAlternate Command Mode that enables the op-eration of the display, audio, and climate controlthrough NISSAN Voice Recognition. When thismode is active, an expanded list of commandscan be spoken after pushing the TALKswitch on the steering wheel, and the voice com-mand menu prompts are turned off.

In Alternate Command Mode the recognitionsuccess rate may be affected because the num-ber of available commands and the ways ofspeaking each command are increased. See“NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com-mand Mode” later in this section.

To improve the recognition success rate whenAlternate Command Mode is active, try using theSpeaker Adaptation Function available in thatmode. See “Speaker Adaptation Function” laterin this section. Otherwise, it is recommended thatAlternate Command Mode be turned off andStandard Mode be used for the best recognitionperformance.

For the voice commands for the navigation sys-tem, refer to the Navigation System Owner’sManual of your vehicle.

For vehicles in the U.S., the factory default settingis the Standard Mode. See “Standard Mode” inthis section. For vehicles in Canada, the factorydefault setting is the Alternate Command Mode.See “Alternate Command Mode” later in this sec-tion.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)


NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITIONSTANDARD MODEThe Standard Mode enables control of naviga-tion, phone and vehicle information. With thissetting active, commands that are available arealways shown on the display and announced bythe system.

Displaying user guideIf you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition systemfor the first time or you do not know how tooperate it, you can display the User Guide forconfirmation.

You can confirm how to use voice commands byaccessing a simplified User Guide, which con-tains basic instructions and tutorials for severalvoice commands.

1. Press the INFO button on the instrumentpanel.

2. Highlight the “Others” key using theNISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key usingthe NISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton.

NOTE:

You can skip steps 1 to 3 by pressingthe switch and saying “Help”.

4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using theNISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton.

5. Highlight an item using the NISSAN control-ler and press the ENTER button.

Available items:

● Getting Started

Describes the basics of how to operate theVoice Recognition system.

● Finding a Street Address

Tutorial for entering a destination by streetaddress.

● Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voicecommand operation.

● Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips of speaking for correctcommand recognition by the system.

● Voice Recognition Settings

Describes the available Voice Recognitionsettings.

LSU0012


Getting startedBefore using the Voice Recognition system forthe first time, you can confirm how to use com-mands by viewing the Getting Started section ofthe User Guide.

1. Highlight “Getting Started” and press theENTER button.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling thescreen using the NISSAN controller.

Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec-ognition system

If you choose “Finding a Street Address” or“Placing Calls”, you can view tutorials on how toperform these operations using Voice Recogni-tion.

Useful tips for correct operationYou can display useful speaking tips to help thesystem recognize your voice commands cor-rectly.

1. Select “Help on Speaking”.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling thescreen using the NISSAN controller ortouching the page down key.

LSU0014 LSU0015


Voice recognition settingsThe available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec-ognition system are described.

1. Highlight “Voice Recognition Settings” andpress the ENTER button.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling thescreen using the NISSAN controller.

USING THE SYSTEMInitializationWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. When completed,the system is ready to accept voice commands. Ifthe switch is pressed before the initializa-tion completes, voice commands will not be ac-cepted. Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec-ognition initialization is completed.

BEFORE STARTINGTo get the best recognition performance fromVoice Recognition, observe the following:

● The interior of the vehicle should be as quietas possible. Close the windows to eliminatethe surrounding noises (traffic noise and vi-bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent thesystem from correctly recognizing the voicecommands.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking acommand.

● Speak in a natural conversational voice with-out pausing between words.

● If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fanspeed is automatically lowered so that yourcommands can be recognized more easily.

GIVING VOICE COMMANDS

1. Press the switch located on thesteering wheel.

LSU0080 WHA1109


2. A list of commands appears on the screen,and the system announces, “Would you liketo access Phone, Navigation, Information orHelp?”

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speaka command.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu promptsand speak after the tone sounds until yourdesired operation is completed.

Operating tips● Say a command after the tone. Voice com-

mands cannot be accepted when the iconis .

● Commands that are available are alwaysshown on the display and spoken throughvoice menu prompts. Commands other thanthose that are displayed are not accepted.Please follow the prompts given by the sys-tem.

● If the command is not recognized, the sys-tem repeats the announcement. Repeat thecommand in a clear voice.

● Press the switch on the steeringwheel to return to the previous screen.

● If you want to cancel the command, pressand hold the switch. The message,“Voice cancelled” will be announced.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-tem feedback, push the volume controlswitch on the steering wheel or use theaudio system volume knob while the systemis making an announcement.

How to speak numbersVoice Recognition requires a certain way tospeak numbers when giving voice commands.Refer to the following examples.

General rule:

● Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

● When saying the phone number 800-662-6200, the system will accept “eight-hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are alsosupported.

Examples:

● 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero six six two six twozero zero”

– “One eight hundred six six two six twozero zero”

LSU0017


Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:

You can improve the recognition of phone num-bers by saying the phone number in three groupsof numbers. For example, when you try to call800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, andthe system will then ask you for the next threedigits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,the system will then ask for the last four digits.Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method ofphone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-mance.

NOTE:

When speaking a house number, speak thenumber “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter“O” is included in the house number, it willnot be recognized as “0” even if you speak“oh” instead of “zero”.


Standard Mode command listCategory Command:

COMMAND ACTIONPhone Displays Phone function commands.Navigation Displays Navigation function commands.Information Displays Vehicle Information.Help Displays User Guide.

Navigation Command:

COMMAND ACTIONAddress Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

Phone Command:

COMMAND ACTIONDial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.

Change Number Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry).Redial Makes a call to the last dialed number.Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook.International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).


Vehicle Information Command: (if so equipped)

COMMAND ACTIONTraffic Info. Turns the traffic information system on and off.Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information.Trip Computer Displays Trip information.Maintenance Displays Maintenance information.


Voice command examplesSome basic voice command examples are de-scribed here.

For navigation system commands, see the sepa-rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Example 1 — Placing a call to the phonenumber 800-662-6200:


2. The system announces, “Would you like toaccess Phone, Navigation, Information orHelp?”

3. Say “Phone”.

WHA1109 LSU0017


4. Say “Dial Number”. 5. Say “800”. 6. The system announces, “Please say the nextthree digits or dial, or say change number.”

7. Say “662”.

LSU0018 LSU0019 LSU0020


8. The system announces, “Please say the lastfour digits or say change number.”

9. Say “6200”.

10. The system announces, “Dial or ChangeNumber?”

11. Say “Dial”.

12. The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200.

NOTE:

● You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-tinuous digits), if the area code is not nec-essary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping isrecommended for improved recognition.See “How to speak numbers” earlier in thissection.

● You can only say a phone number using the3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits usingthis command. Please use the “InternationalCall” command for all other formats, andwhen special characters such as star (*),pound (#), and plus (+) need to be entered.

● If you say “Change Number” during phonenumber entry, the system will automaticallyrequest that you repeat the number usingthe 3-3-4 format. In this case please say thearea code first and then follow the prompts.

● Do not add a “1” in front of the area codewhen speaking phone numbers.

● If the system does not recognize your com-mand, please try repeating the commandusing a natural voice. Speaking too slowly ortoo loudly may further decrease recognitionperformance.

LSU0021 LSU0022


Example 2 — Placing an international callto the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:


2. The system announces, “Would you like toaccess Phone, Navigation, Information orHelp?”

3. Say “Phone”.

4. Say “International Call”.WHA1109 LSU0017 LSU0018


5. Say “011811112223333”. 6. Say “Dial”.

7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111-222-3333.

NOTE:

Any digit input format is available in theInternational Number input process, aswell as the special characters such as star(*), pound (#), and plus (+).

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITIONALTERNATE COMMAND MODEThe Alternate Command Mode enables controlof the Audio, Climate Control and Display sys-tems as well as additional commands for theVehicle Information, Phone and Navigation sys-tems. With this setting active, the system doesnot announce or display the available commandsat each step.

When Alternate Command Mode is activated, anexpanded list of commands can be used afterpushing the TALK switch. Under thismode, the screen for Standard Mode commandsis not available on the display. Please review theexpanded command list, available when thismode is active, as some Standard Mode com-mands are replaced. Please see examples ofAlternate Command Mode screens.

Please note that in this mode the recognitionsuccess rate may be affected as the number ofavailable commands and ways of speaking eachcommand are increased. You can turn this modeON or OFF. When this mode is activated, theVoice Recognition Settings will change to showmore options.

LSU0023 LSU0024


Activating Alternate Command Mode1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel.

2. Highlight the “Others”key on the display andthen press the ENTER button.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key andthen press the ENTER button.

4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode”key and press the ENTER button.

5. The confirmation message is displayed onthe screen. Select the “OK” key and pressthe ENTER button to activate the AlternateCommand Mode.

6. Alternate Command Mode is activated andthe setting menu is expanded to include theAlternate Command Mode options. See“Settings menu” later in this section for anexplanation of the options.

Displaying the command listIf you are controlling the system by voice com-mands for the first time or do not know theappropriate voice command, perform the follow-ing procedure for displaying the voice commandlist (available only in Alternate Command Mode).

Press the switch, listen for the tone andsay, “Help”. The system will respond by display-ing the command list main menu.

WHA1125 LSU0026 LSU0027


Only manual controls such as the touchscreencan navigate the command list menu.

As an alternative to the voice command “Help”,you may access the command list using the fol-lowing steps:


2. Highlight the “Others” key using the NISSANcontroller and press the ENTER button.


NOTE:

You can skip steps 1 to 3 if you say “Help”.

4. Highlight the “Command List” key using theNISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton.

5. Highlight a category using the NISSAN con-troller and press the ENTER button. Thecommand list for the category selected isshown.

6. If necessary, scroll the screen using theNISSAN controller to view the entire list.

7. Press the BACK button to return to theprevious screen.

WHA1126 LSU0028 WHA1126


Alternate Command Mode command listNavigation Command:

COMMAND ACTIONHome Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.Address Book Displays the first 5 entries of the Address Book.Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.Previous Start Point Calculates a route to your previous starting point of the last route.Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.Fastest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the fastest estimated time.Minimize Freeway Recalculates a route to the current destination while minimizing freeway usage.Shortest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the shortest distance.Recalculate Recalculates a route to the current destination.Route Information Displays the Route Information Menu.Cancel Route Cancels the current route.Detour Displays a list of distances to detour from the current route.Show Current Location Displays the current location on the Map view.Planview Map Changes the Map display to a 2-dimensional view.Birdview Map Changes the Map display to Birdview.Planview Split Map Changes the Map display to show two 2-dimensional maps using a split screen.Birdview Split Map Changes the Map display to show a 2-dimensional map and Birdview map using a split screen.Heading Up Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen.North Up Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen.Zoom In Changes the map scale to a smaller number.Zoom Out Changes the map scale to a larger number.


COMMAND ACTIONLandmark Icons Shows or hides the points of interests on the displays.Guidance Voice Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off.Guide Voice Repeat Repeats the last navigation voice guidance.Store Location Stores the current location to the Address Book.

Phone Command:

COMMAND ACTIONRedial Makes a call to the last dialed number.Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook.Outgoing Calls Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls.Incoming Calls Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls.International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).

Audio Command:

COMMAND ACTIONRadio Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.Radio AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.Radio FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.Satellite Radio Turns to the SAT band, selecting the station last played.Music Box Turns to the Music Box hard-disk drive audio system.CD Starts to play a CD.


Vehicle Information Command:

COMMAND ACTIONTraffic Info Turns the traffic information system on and off.Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information.Trip Computer Displays Trip information.Maintenance Display Maintenance information.Tire Pressure Displays the Tire Pressure screen.

Climate Control Command:

COMMAND ACTIONClimate Control Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.Climate Control Off Turns the climate control system off.


Displaying user guide

You can confirm how to use voice commands byaccessing a simplified User Guide, which con-tains basic instructions and tutorials for severalvoice commands.


2. Highlight the “Others” key using theNISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton.


4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using theNISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton.

5. Highlight an item using the NISSAN control-ler and press the ENTER button.

Available items:

● Getting Started

Describes the basics of how to operate theVoice Recognition system.

● Using the Address Book

Tutorial for using the Address Book.

● Finding a Street Address

Tutorial for Finding a Street Address.

LSU0031 LSU0084


● Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voicecommand operation.

● Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips for how to correctlyspeak commands in order for them to beproperly recognized by the system.

● Voice Recognition Settings

Describes the available Voice Recognitionsettings.

● Adapting the System to Your Voice

Tutorial for adapting the system to yourvoice.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. When completed,the system is ready to accept voice commands. Ifthe switch is pressed before the initializa-tion completes the display will show the mes-sage: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.”or a beep sounds.

Before startingTo get the best performance from NISSAN VoiceRecognition, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminate thesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing the voice commands cor-rectly.

● When the climate control is in the AUTOmode, the fan speed decreases automati-cally for easy recognition.

● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking acommand.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

Giving voice commands

1. Press and release the switch locatedon the steering wheel.

WHA1109


2. A list of commands appears on the screen,and the system announces, “Please say acommand from the displayed list or say Helpto show all commands.”


screen changes from to , speaka command.

4. Once a command is recognized, the systemwill announce the recognized command andperform the requested action.

If the command is not recognized, the sys-tem repeats the announcement. Repeat thecommand in a clear voice after the tone.

Operating tips● Say a command after the tone. Voice com-

mands cannot be accepted when the iconis .

● If the command is not recognized, the sys-tem repeats the announcement. Repeat thecommand in a clear voice.

● Press the switch on the steeringwheel to return to the previous screen.

● If you want to cancel the command, pressand hold the switch. The message,“Voice cancelled” will be announced.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-tem feedback, push the volume controlswitch on the steering wheel or use theaudio system volume knob while the systemis making an announcement.

● To minimize the amount of prompts spoken bythe system in Alternate Command Mode, usethe Minimize Voice Feedback function. To ac-cess the Minimize Voice Feedback functionpress the SETTING button, then select the“Others” key using the NISSAN controller andpress the ENTER button. Then select the“Voice Recognition” key using the NISSANcontroller and press the ENTER button.

How to speak numbers

Voice Recognition requires a certain way tospeak numbers when giving voice commands.Refer to the following examples.

General rule:

● Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

● When saying the phone number 800-662-6200, the system will accept “eight-hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are alsosupported.

Examples:

● 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero six six two six twozero zero”

– “One eight hundred six six two six twozero zero”

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:

You can improve the recognition of phone num-bers by saying the phone number in three groupsof numbers. For example, when you try to call800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, andthe system will then ask you for the next threedigits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,the system will then ask for the last four digits.

LSU0033


Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method ofphone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-mance.

NOTE:

When speaking a house number, speak thenumber “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter“O” is included in the house number, it willnot be recognized as “0” even if you speak“oh” instead of “zero”.

Settings menuThe content of the Settings Menu differs whenthe system is in the Alternate Command Mode.

Command List:

Displays the command list for Alternate Com-mand Mode.

User Guide:

The user guide provides basic instructions forusing Voice Recognition and accessing somevoice commands.

NOTE:

The user guide can also be accessed fromwithin the INFO menu after pressing theINFO button.

Speaker Adaptation:

Starts a system training procedure to learn thespecific sounds of your voice. See “Speaker ad-aptation function” in this section.

Alternate Command Mode:

For advanced operation, an Alternate CommandMode is provided. This setting enables control ofthe Audio and Climate Control systems in addi-tion to additional commands for the Phone andNavigation systems. With this setting active, thesystem does not announce or display the avail-able commands at each step. When this mode isactivated, the Voice Recognition Settings willchange to show more options.

Minimize Voice Feedback:

Reduces the amount of the information spokenfor each voice instruction.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTIONThe Voice Recognition system has a function tolearn the user’s voice for better voice recognitionperformance. The system can memorize thevoices of up to three persons.

Having the system learn the user’s voice1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel, highlight the “Others” key on thedisplay and then press the ENTER button.

2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key andthen press the ENTER button.

3. Highlight the “Speaker Adaptation” key andthen press the ENTER button.

LSU0080


4. Select the user whose voice is to be memo-rized by the system and press the ENTERbutton.

5. Select a category to be learned by the sys-tem from the following list and then press theENTER button.● Navigation● Audio● Phone● Vehicle Info.● Others

The voice commands in the category aredisplayed.

6. Select a voice command to train and thenpress the ENTER button.

The Voice Recognition system starts.

7. The system requests that you repeat a com-mand after a tone. This command is alsodisplayed on the screen.


screen changes from to , speakthe command that the system requested.

9. When the system has recognized the voicecommand, the voice of the user is learned.

Press the switch or the BACK button toreturn to the previous screen.

If the system has learned the command correctly,the voice command indicator on the screen turnson.

LSU0034 LSU0082 LSU0036


Speaker Adaptation function settingsEdit Name:

Edit the user name using the keypad displayed onthe screen.

Store Result:

When this item is turned to ON, the Voice Rec-ognition system can easily recognize the user’svoice that it has learned.

Reset Result:

Resets the user’s voice that the Voice Recogni-tion system has learned.

Continuous Learning:

When this item is turned to ON, you can have thesystem learn the voice commands in succession,without selecting commands one by one.

LSU0037


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, follow the solutions given in this guidefor the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number one,until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message SolutionDisplays “COMMAND NOT RECOG-NIZED” or the system fails to interpretthe command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Standard Mode command list” or “Alternate Command Mode command list” earlier in thissection.

2. Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.The system consistently selects thewrong voicetag in the phonebook.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. See “Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System with NavigationSystem” in this section.

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.


MEMO


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-10Ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Using four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

WARNING



EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the rear vent windows, lift gates,doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)closed while driving, otherwise exhaustgases could be drawn into the passen-ger compartment. If you must drive withone of these open, follow theseprecautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the lift gate or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you should stop andcheck all your tires as soon as possible, andinflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Starting and driving 5-3

Additional information:

● The TPMS does not monitor the tirepressure of the spare tire.

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25km/h). Also, this system may not detect asudden drop in tire pressure (for example aflat tire while driving).

● The low tire pressure warning light does notautomatically turn off when the tire pressureis adjusted in all 4 tires. After the tire isinflated to the recommended pressure, thevehicle must be driven at speeds above 16MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS andturn off the low tire pressure warning light.Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tirepressure.

● The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warn-ing message is displayed in the odometerwhen the low tire pressure warning light isilluminated and low tire pressure is detected.The CHECK TIRE PRES warning messageturns off when the low tire pressure warninglight turns off. Press the reset button formore than 1 second to manually turn off theCHECK TIRE PRES warning message. Thelow tire pressure warning light remains illu-minated until the tires are inflated to therecommended COLD tire pressure. TheCHECK TIRE PRES warning message isdisplayed each time the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position as long as the lowtire pressure warning light remains illumi-nated. “Check tire pressure warning mes-sage” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion.

● The CHECK TIRE PRES warning messageis not displayed if the low tire pressure warn-ing light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal-function.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates in lowambient temperature, check the tire pres-sure for all 4 tires.

● The Tire and Loading Information label (alsoreferred to as the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label) is located in thedriver’s door opening.

● You can also check the pressure of all tires(except the spare tire) on the display screen.The order of the tire pressure figures dis-played on the screen does not correspondwith the actual order of the tire position. See“Tire pressure information” in the “Heater, airconditioner, audio and phone systems” sec-tion.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.


WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning light illu-minates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road toa safe location and stop the vehicle assoon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an accidentand could result in serious personal in-jury. Check the tire pressure for all fourtires. Adjust the tire pressure to the rec-ommended COLD tire pressure shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label toturn the low tire pressure warning lightOFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it witha spare tire as soon as possible. (See“Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”section for changing a flat tire.)

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel isreplaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated, the TPMS will not function and thelow tire pressure warning light will flashfor approximately 1 minute. The light willremain on after 1 minute. Contact yourNISSAN dealer as soon as possible fortire replacement and/or system resetting.


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarilyinterfere with the operation of the TPMS andcause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-minate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radiofrequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies isbeing used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or aDC/AC converter is being used in or near thevehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.Note: Changes or modification not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void the us-er’s authority to operate theequipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-ence, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence, include interference that maycause undesired operation of the de-vice.


ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROADDRIVING PRECAUTIONSUtility vehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen-ger cars to make them capable of performing in avariety of on-pavement and off-road applications.This gives them a higher center of gravity thanordinary cars. An advantage of higher groundclearance is a better view of the road, allowingyou to anticipate problems. However, they are notdesigned for cornering at the same speeds asconventional two-wheel drive vehicles any morethan low-slung sports cars are designed to per-form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If atall possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. Aswith other vehicles of this type, failure to operatethis vehicle correctly may result in loss of controlor vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

Be sure to read the driving safety precautionslater in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey alltraffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, highspeed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers,because these driving practices could cause youto lose control of your vehicle. As with any ve-hicle, loss of control could result in a colli-sion with other vehicles or objects or causethe vehicle to roll over, particularly if the lossof control causes the vehicle to slide side-ways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid drivingwhen tired. Never drive when under the influence ofalcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness).Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the“Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-straint system” section of this manual, and alsoinstruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisionsand rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedor improperly belted person is significantlymore likely to be injured or killed than aperson properly wearing a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERYIf the right side or left side wheels unintentionallyleave the road surface, maintain control of thevehicle by following the procedure below. Pleasenote that this procedure is only a general guide.The vehicle must be driven as appropriate basedon the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel withboth hands and try to hold a straight course.

4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-hicle to follow the road while vehicle speedis reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-hicle back onto the road surface until vehiclespeed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn thesteering wheel until both tires return to theroad surface. When all tires are on the roadsurface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-propriate driving lane.

● If you decide that it is not safe to return thevehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,road or traffic conditions, gradually slow thevehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.


RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occurif the tire is punctured or is damaged due tohitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure losscan also be caused by driving on under-inflatedtires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handlingand stability of the vehicle, especially at highwayspeeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-ing the correct air pressure and visually inspectthe tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels andtires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses airpressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintaincontrol of the vehicle by following the procedurebelow. Please note that this procedure is only ageneral guide. The vehicle must be driven asappropriate based on the conditions of the ve-hicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase thechance of losing control of the vehicle ifthere is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.Losing control of the vehicle may cause acollision and result in personal injury.

● The vehicle generally moves or pulls inthe direction of the flat tire.

● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

● Do not rapidly release the acceleratorpedal.

● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not over react.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe locationoff the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to graduallystop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers andeither contact a roadside emergency serviceto change the tire or see “Changing a flattire” in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.


DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal andoff-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed forleisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-hicle.

Remember that two-wheel drive models are lesscapable than four-wheel drive models for roughroad driving and extrication when stuck in deepsnow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

● Drive carefully when off the road andavoid dangerous areas. Every personwho drives or rides in this vehicleshould be seated with their seat beltfastened. This will keep you and yourpassengers in position when drivingover rough terrain.

● Do not drive across steep slopes. In-stead drive either straight up or straightdown the slopes. Off-road vehicles cantip over sideways much more easilythan they can forward or backward.

● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.If you drive up them, you may stall. Ifyou drive down them, you may not beable to control your speed. If you driveacross them, you may roll over.

● Do not shift gears while driving ondownhill grades as this could causeloss of control of the vehicle.

● Stay alert when driving to the top of ahill. At the top there could be a drop-offor other hazard that could cause anaccident.

● If your engine stalls or you cannot makeit to the top of a steep hill, never at-tempt to turn around. Your vehiclecould tip or roll over. Always backstraight down in R (Reverse) gear andapply brakes to control your speed.

● Heavy braking going down a hill couldcause your brakes to overheat and fade,resulting in loss of control and an acci-dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a lowgear to control your speed.

● Unsecured cargo can be thrown aroundwhen driving over rough terrain. Prop-erly secure all cargo so it will not bethrown forward and cause injury to youor your passengers.

● To avoid raising the center of gravityexcessively, do not exceed the ratedcapacity of the roof rack/gear bin (if soequipped) and evenly distribute theload. Secure heavy loads in the cargoarea as far forward and as low as pos-sible. Do not equip the vehicle with tireslarger than specified in this manual.This could cause your vehicle to rollover.

● Do not grip the inside or spokes of thesteering wheel when driving off-road.The steering wheel could move sud-denly and injure your hands. Insteaddrive with your fingers and thumbs onthe outside of the rim.

● Before operating the vehicle, ensurethat the driver and all passengers havetheir seat belts fastened.

● Always drive with the floor mats inplace as the floor may become hot.

● Lower your speed when encounteringstrong crosswinds. With a higher centerof gravity, your NISSAN is more af-fected by strong side winds. Slowerspeeds ensure better vehicle control.


● Do not drive beyond the performancecapability of the tires, even with 4WDengaged.

● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-tempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may result indrivetrain damage or unexpected ve-hicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personalinjury.

● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equippedvehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer(such as the dynamometers used bysome states for emissions testing), orsimilar equipment even if the other twowheels are raised off the ground. Makesure you inform test facility personnelthat your vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamometer.Using the wrong test equipment mayresult in drivetrain damage or unex-pected vehicle movement which couldresult in serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

● Accelerating quickly, sharp steeringmaneuvers or sudden braking maycause loss of control.

● If at all possible, avoid sharp turningmaneuvers, particularly at high speeds.Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehiclehas a higher center of gravity than apassenger car. The vehicle is not de-signed for cornering at the samespeeds as passenger cars. Failure tooperate this vehicle correctly could re-sult in loss of control and/or a rolloveraccident.

● Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,or radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Install tire chains on the rearwheels when driving on slippery roadsand drive carefully.

● Be sure to check the brakes immedi-ately after driving in mud or water. See“Brake system” later in this section for“Wet brakes”.

● Avoid parking your vehicle on steephills. If you get out of the vehicle and itrolls forward, backward or sideways,you could be injured.

● Whenever you drive off-road throughsand, mud or water as deep as thewheel hub, more frequent maintenancemay be required. See “Periodic mainte-nance” in the “NISSAN Service andMaintenance Guide.”


WARNING

● Never remove or turn the key to theLOCK position while driving. The steer-ing wheel will lock (for models with asteering lock mechanism). This maycause the driver to lose control of thevehicle and could result in serious ve-hicle damage or personal injury.

● Never place the ignition switch in theLOCK position while driving. The steer-ing wheel will lock (for models with asteering lock mechanism). This maycause the driver to lose control of thevehicle and could result in serious ve-hicle damage or personal injury. NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so

equipped)

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to LOCK until the shiftselector is moved to the P (Park) position.

When turning the ignition switch, make sure theshift selector is in the P (Park) position.

If the shift selector is not returned to the P (Park)position, the ignition switch cannot be movedtoward LOCK.

When the ignition switch cannot be turned to-ward the LOCK position when the Intelligent Keyis in range, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)position.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ONdirection.

3. Turn the switch toward the LOCK position.

The shift selector can be moved from the P(Park) position if the ignition switch is inthe ON position and the foot brake pedal isdepressed.

There is an OFF position in between LOCK andACC, although it does not show on the ignitionswitch. When the ignition switch is OFF, thesteering wheel is not locked (for models with asteering wheel lock mechanism).

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclock-wise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position. To unlock thesteering wheel, push the ignition switch inand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the battery of the vehicle equipped withthe Intelligent Key system is discharged,the ignition switch cannot be turned fromthe LOCK position, even using the me-chanical key.

LSD0171

IGNITION SWITCH


IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS

Push in the ignition switch to the �B positionwhen you turn it.

LOCK (Normal parking position) �A :

The ignition switch can only be locked in theLOCK position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it ispushed in, and turned to the ACC position �Cwhile carrying the Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories) �C :

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position) �D :

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START �E :

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the ignition switchimmediately. It will automatically return to the ONposition.

The ignition switch cannot be turned back to theLOCK position unless the shift selector is in the P(Park) position. (It can be turned only to the �Bposition.)

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignitionswitch in ACC or ON positions when theengine is not running for an extended pe-riod. This can discharge the battery.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONThe ignition lock is designed so the ignitionswitch cannot be placed in the LOCK positionand the key cannot be removed until the shiftselector is moved to the P (Park) position.

When removing the key from the ignition switch,make sure the shift selector is in the P (Park)position.

If the shift selector is not returned to P (Park)position, the ignition switch cannot be placed inthe LOCK position.

WSD0041


To remove the key from the ignition switch:

1. Shift the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion with the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.


3. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

If the shift selector is shifted to the P (Park)position after the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position or when the ignition switch cannotbe placed in the LOCK position, proceed asfollows to remove the key.

1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)position.

2. Place the ignition switch slightly toward theON position.


4. Remove the key.

The shift selector is designed so it cannot moveout of P (Park) and into any of the other gearpositions if the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position or if the key is removed from theswitch.

The shift selector can be moved if the igni-tion switch is in the ON position and thefoot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between theLOCK and ON positions. The OFF positionis indicated by a “1” on the ignition switch.For models without NISSAN vehicle immo-bilizer system: when the ignition switch isin the OFF position, the steering wheel isnot locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignitionto the LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi-tion, turn the steering wheel to the left orright while turning the key to unlock thekey cylinder.

KEY POSITIONSLOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the key. It automati-cally returns to the ON position.


NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately 10seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluidas frequently as possible, or at least when-ever you refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Check that all doors are closed.

● Position seat and adjust head restraint andheadrests (if so equipped).

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-tion. See “Warning/indicator lights and au-dible reminders” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector cannot be moved outof P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition switch isturned to the OFF position or if the keyis removed from the ignition switch.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector is in any of the drivingpositions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by placing the ignitionswitch in the START position. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine. Release thekey and the accelerator pedal when theengine starts.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE


● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. Aftercranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal by turn-ing the ignition key to START. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, otherwisethe starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running fora minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting itoff. Starting and stopping the engine over ashort period of time may make the vehiclemore difficult to start.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1.Always depress the brake pedal untilshifting is completed. Failure to do socould cause you to lose control andhave an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

● Except in an emergency, do not shift tothe N (Neutral) position while driving.Doing so can cause a loss of enginebraking which may result in a collision,serious personal injury or death. In ad-dition, coasting with the transmissionin the N (Neutral) position may causeserious damage to the transmission.

CAUTION

● When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by de-pressing the accelerator pedal. The footbrake should be used for this purpose.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled to produce maximumpower and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shiftselector out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


The automatic transmission is designed sothe foot brake pedal MUST be depressedbefore shifting from P (Park) to any driveposition while the ignition switch is in theON position.

The shift selector cannot be moved out ofthe P (Park) position and into any of theother gear positions if the ignition switch isplaced in the LOCK or OFF position.

To move the shift selector:

: Push the button while depressing thebrake pedal

: Push the button to shift

: Shift without depressing brake pedal orpushing the button

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector out of the P(Park) position while pressing the button.

Type ALSD0151

Type BWSD0213


WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-tor is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF positionfor any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral),or any D (Drive) position, the ignition switch can-not be turned to the LOCK position and the key (ifso equipped) cannot be removed from the igni-tion switch. Move the shift selector to the P (Park)position, then the ignition switch can be turned toLOCK.

P (Park):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) or R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift selector position when thevehicle is parked or when starting the engine.Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.The brake pedal should be depressed tomove the shift selector from N (Neutral) orany drive position to P (Park). Apply theparking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the

parking brake first, then move the shift selectorinto the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) or R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Makesure the vehicle is completely stopped beforeselecting the R (Reverse) position. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the shiftselector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or anydrive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

3 (Third gear) Type A only:

Use this position for driving up and down longslopes where engine braking would be advanta-geous.

Do not downshift into the 3 position at speedsover the following and do not exceed the follow-ing speeds in the 3 position.

2WD and AUTO:

99 MPH (160 km/h)

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h)

2 (Second gear) Type A only:

Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-ing on downhill grades.


2WD and AUTO:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4LO:

21 MPH (35 km/h)


1 (Low gear) Type A only:

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,or for maximum engine braking on steep downhillgrades.


2WD and AUTO:

37 MPH (60 km/h)

4H:

37 MPH (60 km/h)

4LO:

12 MPH (20 km/h)

Manual shift mode (if so equipped)

When the shift selector is shifted from D (Drive)to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stoppedor while driving, the transmission enters themanual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selectedmanually.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-played on the position indicator in the meter.When shifting the shift selector to the manualshift gate, the position indicator displays 1 (First)up to 5 (Fifth) depending on vehicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5

M5 (Fifth):

Use this position for all normal forward driving athighway speeds.

M4 (Fourth):

For driving up or down long slopes where enginebraking would be advantageous.

M3 (Third) and M2 (Second):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhillgrades.

M1 (First):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor driving slowly through deep snow, sand ormud, or for maximum engine braking on steepdownhill grades.

● Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time in lower than M4range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up:

Move the shift selector to the + (up) side. (Shiftsto higher range.)

WSD0212


When shifting down:

Move the shift selector to the � (down) side.(Shifts to lower range.)

● The transmission will automatically down-shift the gears. (For example, if you select the3rd range, the transmission will shift downbetween the 3rd and 1st gears.)

● Moving the shift selector rapidly to the sameside twice will shift the ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Return the shift selector to the D (Drive) positionto return the transmission to the normal drivingmode.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may not shift to the selected gear.This helps maintain driving perfor-mance and reduces the chance of ve-hicle damage or loss of control.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may shift up automatically to ahigher range than selected if the en-gine speed is too high. When the ve-hicle speed decreases, the transmis-sion automatically shifts down andshifts to 1st gear before the vehiclecomes to a stop.

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift selector maynot be moved from the P (Park) position even withthe brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector, release the shift lock.The shift selector can be moved to N (Neutral).However, the steering wheel will be locked un-less the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-tion (for models with a steering lock mechanism).This allows the vehicle to be moved if the batteryis discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key (if so equipped)


3. Remove the shift lock release cover asshown.

4. Use protective cloth on the tip of a smallscrewdriver before inserting it in the shiftlock release slot and push down.

5. Press the shift selector button and move theshift selector to the N (Neutral) positionwhile holding down the shift lock release.

Type ALSD0141

Type BWSD0214


6. Place the ignition switch in the ON positionto unlock the steering wheel (for models witha steering lock mechanism). Now the vehiclemay be moved to the desired location.

If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-matic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the shift selector cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift— in D position —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Overdrive switch

Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis-sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON.

ON: With the engine running and theshift selector in the D (Drive)position, the transmission upshiftsinto Overdrive as vehicle speedincreases.

Overdrive does not engage until the enginehas reached operating temperature.

OFF: For driving up and down longslopes where engine braking is nec-essary push the Overdrive switchonce. The O/D OFF indicator lightin the instrument panel comes on atthis time.

When cruising at a low speed or climbing agentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shiftshocks as the transmission shifts into and out ofOverdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress theOverdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. TheO/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panelcomes on at this time.

When driving conditions change, depress theOverdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-tended periods of time with the Overdrive off.This reduces fuel economy.

LSD0142


WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the shift selector in place ofthe parking brake. When parking, besure the parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and itwill release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

1. ACCEL/RES switch2. COAST/SET switch3. CANCEL switch4. ON·OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control switch off and have the sys-tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

LSD0158 LSD0159

PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL


● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control switch is turned ON whilepushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, orCANCEL switch. To properly set the cruisecontrol system, use the following proce-dures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the ON-•OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in theinstrument panel comes on. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the setspeed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Push the ON•OFF switch. Both the CRUISEindicator light and SET indicator light in theinstrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake pedal while pushingthe ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.The preset speed is deleted from memory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you move the shift selector to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).


To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.Improper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY


● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● For vehicles equipped with , use 4Hor 4L position only when necessary. Four-wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy.

WARNING

● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-tempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may result indrivetrain damage or unexpected ve-hicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personalinjury.

● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equippedvehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer orsimilar equipment even if the other twowheels are raised off the ground. Makesure you inform test facility personnelthat your vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamometer.Using the wrong test equipment mayresult in drivetrain damage or unex-pected vehicle movement which couldresult in serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

CAUTION

● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LOposition on dry hard surface roads. Driv-ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise, tire wearand increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on whenyou are driving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WDvehicles, stop the vehicle and shift theshift selector to the N (Neutral) posi-tion with the brake pedal depressedand shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for part time 4WDvehicles, stop the vehicle and shift theshift selector to the N (Neutral) posi-tion with the brake pedal depressedand shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.


● The transfer case may be damaged ifyou continue driving with the warninglight blinking.

USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE(4WD)


All mode 4WD system (if soequipped)The all mode 4WD system provides 4 positions(AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can selectthe desired drive mode according to the drivingconditions.

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD ShiftSwitchPosition

Wheels DrivenIndicator Light

Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure4WD shift Transfer 4LOposition

AUTO

Rear wheels or4 wheels For driving on paved or slippery roads

Move the 4WD switch.2WD <—> AUTO <—> 4H4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift positionengaged.IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE TRANSMISSIONSELECTOR TO THE (N) POSITION IN THIS OPERATION.PERFORM THIS OPERATION WHEN DRIVINGSTRAIGHT.2WD

Rear wheels For driving on dry, paved roads(Economy drive)

4H

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or snow-covered roads

Neutral

*1May blink

Neutral disengages the automatictransmission mechanical parking lock,which will allow the vehicle to roll. Donot leave the transfer shift position inNeutral.*2

1. Stop the vehicle.2. Shift the transmission selector to the (N) position.3. Depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H

with the brake pedal depressed.YOU CANNOT MOVE THE TRANSFER 4WD SHIFTSWITCH BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UN-LESS YOU FIRST STOP THE VEHICLE DEPRESS THEBRAKE AND SHIFT THE TRANSMISSION SHIFT SELEC-TOR TO THE NEUTRAL (N) POSITION, THEN DEPRESSAND TURN THE 4WD SHIFT SWITCH TO 4LO OR 4H. *3

4LO 4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximum power andtraction is required (for example: onsteep grades or rocky, sandy, muddyroads)


*1 The transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink. Stop the vehicle. Be sure to shift the 4WD shift switch after the transmission selector has been shiftedto the N position. If the indicator light keeps blinking after the 4WD shift procedure in the previous page, drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while.Then the light will turn on or off.

• Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to 4LO. Otherwise gears may grind, damaging the drive system.

*2 While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition switch must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicatorlights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light will also turn on when4LO is selected. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” later in this section.


The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used toselect either 2WD or 4WD depending on thedriving conditions. There are four types of drivemodes available, AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls thetransfer case operation. Rotate the switch tomove between each mode, 2WD, AUTO, 4H and4LO.

You must depress the switch to select 4LO,and the vehicle MUST be stationary and theshift selector in the (N) Neutral positionwhen changing into or out of 4LO.

WARNING

When parking, apply the parking brakebefore stopping the engine and make surethat the 4WD shift indicator light is on andthe ATP warning light goes off. Otherwise,the vehicle could unexpectedly move evenif the automatic transmission is in the Pposition.

CAUTION

● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

● The 4H position provides greater trac-tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it willcause increased fuel consumption andhigher oil temperatures, and coulddamage drivetrain component. Speedsover 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H is notrecommended.

● The 4LO position provides maximumtraction. Avoid raising vehicle speed ex-cessively, as the maximum speed is ap-proximately 31 MPH (50 km/h).

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4Hposition. Do not move the 4WD shiftswitch when making a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-tween 2WD, AUTO and 4H) while drivingon steep downhill grades. Use the en-gine brake and low automatic transmis-sion gears (D1 or D2) for enginebraking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch(between 2WD, AUTO and 4H) with therear wheels spinning.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dryhard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may causeunnecessary noise and tire wear.NISSAN recommends driving in the2WD or AUTO position under theseconditions.

● The 4WD transfer case may not beshifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-bient temperatures and the transfer4LO position indicator light may blinkeven when the 4WD shift switch isshifted. After driving for a while you canchange the 4WD transfer case between4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

● Set the 4WD shift switch to AUTO, 4H or4LO.

● Drive carefully according to the road surfaceconditions.


When the vehicle is stuck,

● Place stones or wooden blocks under thetires to free the vehicle.

● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeatforward and backward movement to in-crease the movement.

● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tire chainsmay be effective.

CAUTION

● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tireswill sink deep into the mud, making itdifficult to free the vehicle.

● Avoid shifting gears with the enginerunning at high speeds as this maycause malfunction.


Part time 4WD system (if soequipped)The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions(2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select thedesired drive mode according to the driving con-ditions.

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD ShiftSwitchPosition

Wheels DrivenIndicator Light

Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure4WD shift Transfer 4LOposition

2WDRear wheels For driving on dry, paved roads (Economy

drive)

Move the 4WD switch.2WD <—> 4H4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift posi-tion engaged.IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO SHIFT THE TRANSMIS-SION SHIFT SELECTOR TO THE N POSITION INTHIS OPERATION. PERFORM THIS OPERATIONWHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.

4H

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or snow-coveredroads

Neutral

*1May blink

Neutral disengages the automatic transmissionmechanical parking lock, which will allow thevehicle to roll. Do not leave the transfer shiftposition in Neutral.*2

1. Stop the vehicle.2. Shift the transmission selector to the (N) position

with the brake pedal depressed.3. Depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or

4H with the brake pedal depressed.THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BE-TWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOUHAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSEDTHE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE TRANSMIS-SION SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL. *3

4LO 4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximum power and traction isrequired (for example: on steep grades orrocky, sandy, muddy roads)


*1: Before moving the transmission shift selector from neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedureis completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gearmay grind, not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.

- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.

1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch �OFF�.

2. Start the engine.

- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD light illuminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the transmission shift selector to Neutral position.

4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to desired mode.

- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the transmission shift selector from Neutral position.

*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicatorlights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light will also turn on when4LO is selected. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” later in this section.


The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used toselect either 2WD or 4WD depending on thedriving conditions. There are three types of drivemodes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls thetransfer case operation. Rotate the switch tomove between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicleMUST be stationary, shift the transmissionselector to Neutral (N), and depress thebrake pedal. The switch must be depressedand turned when changing into or out of4LO.

WARNING

● When parking, apply the parking brakebefore stopping the engine and makesure that the 4WD shift indicator light ison and the ATP warning light goes off.Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect-edly move even if the automatic trans-mission is in the P position.

● The 4LO indicator light must stop blink-ing and remain illuminated or turn offbefore shifting the transmission intogear. If the transmission selector isshifted from the (N) position to anyother gear when the 4LO indicator lightis blinking, the vehicle may moveunexpectedly.

CAUTION


● The 4H position provides greater trac-tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it willcause increased fuel consumption andhigher oil temperatures, and coulddamage drivetrain components.Speeds over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H isnot recommended.

● The 4LO position provides maximumtraction. Avoid raising vehicle speed ex-cessively, as the maximum speed is ap-proximately 31 MPH (50 km/h).

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.Do not move the 4WD shift switch whenmaking a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-tween 2WD and 4H) while driving onsteep downhill grades. Use the enginebrake and low automatic transmissiongears (D1 or D2) for engine braking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch(between 2WD and 4H) with the rearwheels spinning.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dryhard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may causeunnecessary noise and tire wear.NISSAN recommends driving in the2WD position under these conditions.

● The 4WD transfer case may not beshifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-bient temperatures and the transfer4LO position indicator light may blinkeven when the 4WD shift switch isshifted. After driving for a while you canchange the 4WD transfer case between4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,


● Drive carefully according to the road surfaceconditions.


When the vehicle is stuck,


● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeatforward and backward movement to in-crease the movement.

● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, placestones or wooden blocks under the tires.Then try the recovery procedures above. Tirechains may be effective.

CAUTION

● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tireswill sink deep into the mud, making itdifficult to free the vehicle.

● Avoid shifting gears with the enginerunning at high speeds as this maycause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations

● Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the2WD, AUTO (Type A only), 4H or 4LO po-sition, depending on driving conditions.

● With the switch set to the AUTO position(Type A only), distribution of torque to thefront and rear wheels changes automatically,depending on road conditions encountered[ratio; 0 : 100 (2WD) → 50 : 50 (4WD)].This results in improved driving stability.

● If the 4WD shift switch is operatedwhile making a turn, accelerating ordecelerating or if the key switch isturned off while in the AUTO (Type Aonly), 4H or 4LO, you may feel a jolt.This is not abnormal.

● When the vehicle is stopped after mak-ing a turn, you may feel a slight joltafter the shift selector is shifted to N orP. This occurs because the transferclutch is released and not because of amalfunction.

Type ALSD0144

Type BLSD0145


CAUTION

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4Hposition. Do not move the 4WD shiftswitch when making a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch whiledriving on steep downhill grades. Usethe engine brake and low automatictransmission gears (D1 or D2) for en-gine braking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switchwith the rear wheels spinning.

● Before placing the 4WD shift switch inthe 4H position from 2WD or AUTO,ensure the vehicle speed is less than 62MPH (100 km/h). Failure to do so candamage the 4WD system.


● Engine idling speed is high while warm-ing up the engine. Be especially carefulwhen starting or driving on slippery sur-faces with the 4WD shift switch set inAUTO.

4WD shift indicator light

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in theodometer display.

The light should turn off within one second afterturning the ignition switch to the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-cator light will illuminate the position selected bythe 4WD shift switch.

● The 4WD shift indicator light may blinkwhile shifting from one drive mode tothe other. When the shifting is com-pleted, the 4WD shift indicator lightwill come on. For all mode 4WD ve-

hicles, if the indicator light does notcome on immediately, make sure thearea around the vehicle is safe, anddrive the vehicle straight, accelerate ordecelerate or move the vehicle in re-verse, then shift the 4WD shift switch.

● If the 4WD warning light comes on, the4WD indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

● When the 4WD shift switch is turned tothe AUTO position at low ambient tem-peratures, the 4WD shift indicator lightmay show 4H. If this happens, all fourwheels are driven as torque distributionis in the 4H position. Be careful as thevehicle may become difficult to turn.When the vehicle is driven, the 4WD shiftindicator light should change to AUTO.

● If the 4WD shift indicator light indica-tion changes to 2WD when the 4WDshift switch is shifted to the AUTO or 4Hposition at low ambient temperatures,the 2WD mode may be being engageddue to malfunctioning drive system. Ifthe indicator does not return to normaland the 4WD warning light comes on,have the system checked by the nearestNISSAN dealer.

LSD0147


4WD warning light

Warning light Comes on or blinkswhen:

Comes onThere is a malfunc-tion in the 4–wheel

drive system

Blinksrapidly

The transfer case oiltemperature is abnor-mally high (all mode

4WD vehicles)

Blinksslowly

The difference inwheel rotation is

large

The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.

The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni-tion switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon afterthe engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD systemwhen the ignition switch is ON, the warning lightwill either remain illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WDshift indicator light goes out.

For all mode 4WD vehicles, high-temperaturetransfer case oil makes the warning light blinkrapidly (about twice per second). If the warninglight blinks rapidly during operation, stop the ve-hicle in a safe place immediately. Then if the lightgoes off after a while, you can continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of frontand rear wheels will make the warning light blinkslowly (about once per two seconds). Changethe 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drivefast.

CAUTION

● If the warning light comes on or blinksslowly during operation or rapidly afterstopping the vehicle for a while, haveyour vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer as soon as possible.

● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is notrecommended when the 4WD warninglight turns on.

● When the warning light comes on, the2WD mode may be engaged even if the4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H. Beespecially careful when driving. If corre-sponding parts are malfunctioning, the4WD mode will not be engaged even ifthe 4WD shift switch is shifted.

● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LOposition on dry hard surface roads. Driv-ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise, tire wearand increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on whenyou are driving on dry hard surfaceroads:

– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the4WD shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WDvehicles, stop the vehicle and shiftthe transmission selector to the Nposition and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.


● The transfer case may be damaged ifyou continue driving with the warninglight blinking.


WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park). Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shiftselector has been pushed as far for-ward as it can go and cannot be movedwithout depressing the foot brakepedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: �A

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: �B

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: �C

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS


The power assisted steering uses a hydraulicpump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, especiallyin sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will beharder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at 2 wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever thestopping effect of the parking brake is weakenedor whenever the parking brake shoes and/ordrum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest brake performance.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM


This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS)

WARNING

● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is asophisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from carelessor dangerous driving techniques. It canhelp maintain vehicle control duringbraking on slippery surfaces. Remem-ber that stopping distances on slipperysurfaces will be longer than on normalsurfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-tances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or if youare using tire chains. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-sible for safety.

● Tire type and condition may also affectbraking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size and typeas specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See “Tire andLoading Information label” in the“Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls thebrakes so the wheels do not lock during hardbraking or when braking on slippery surfaces.The system detects the rotation speed at eachwheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding. Bypreventing each wheel from locking, the systemhelps the driver maintain steering control andhelps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Self-test featureThe ABS includes electronic sensors, electricpumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature thattests the system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, you may heara “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and does not indicate amalfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates theABS warning light on the instrument panel. Thebrake system then operates normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during theself-test or while driving, have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer.


Normal operationThe ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to roadconditions.

When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels areclose to locking up, the actuator rapidly appliesand releases hydraulic pressure. This action issimilar to pumping the brakes very quickly. Youmay feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear anoise from under the hood or feel a vibration fromthe actuator when it is operating. This is normaland indicates that the ABS is operating properly.However, the pulsation may indicate that roadconditions are hazardous and extra care is re-quired while driving.

● ABLS system uses automatic braking totransfer power from a slipping drive wheel tothe wheel on the same axle with more trac-tion. The ABLS system applies braking tothe slipping wheel, which helps redirectpower to the other wheel.

● On 4WD models the ABLS system operatesin both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD mode isengaged, the ABLS system operates forboth drive axles. On 2WD vehicles, theABLS system operates on the drive axleonly.

● The ABLS system is always ON. In someconditions, the system may automaticallyturn the ABLS system off. If the system isautomatically turned off, normal brake func-tion will continue. ABLS will function evenwhen the VDC system is turned OFF.

● The ABLS does not operate if both wheelson a drive axle are slipping.

WARNING

● The ABLS system helps provide in-creased traction, but will not preventaccidents due to abrupt steering opera-tion or by careless driving or dangerousdriving practices. Reduce vehicle speedand be especially careful when drivingand cornering on slippery surfaces. Al-ways drive carefully.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,bushings and wheels are not NISSAN ap-proved for your vehicle or are extremelydeteriorated, the ABLS system may notoperate properly. This could adversely af-fect vehicle handling performance, andthe slip indicator light may illuminate.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are extremelydeteriorated, the ABLS system may notoperate properly and the slip indicatorlight may illuminate.

● If wheels or tires other than the NISSANrecommended ones are used, the ABLSsystem may not operate properly andthe slip indicator light may illuminate.

ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)SYSTEM


The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system usesvarious sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions,the VDC System helps to perform the followingfunctions:

● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheelslip on one slipping drive wheel so power istransferred to a non slipping drive wheel onthe same axle.

● Controls brake pressure and engine outputto reduce drive wheel slip based on vehiclespeed (traction control function).

● If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LOthe indicator light will come on andthe VDC system will be turned off. See “Us-ing four wheel drive (4WD)” earlier in thissection.

● Controls brake pressure at individual wheelsand engine output to help the driver maintaincontrol of the vehicle in the following condi-tions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not followthe steered path despite increased steer-ing input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due tocertain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintaincontrol of the vehicle, but it can not prevent lossof vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the indi-cator in the instrument panel flashes so note thefollowing:

● The road may be slippery or the system maydetermine some action is required to helpkeep the vehicle on the steered path.

● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedaland hear a noise or vibration from under thehood. This is normal and indicates that theVDC system is working properly.

● Adjust your speed and driving to the roadconditions.

See “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instru-ments and controls” section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, theand indicator lights come on in the instru-ment panel. The VDC system automatically turnsoff when these indicator lights are on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDCsystem. The indicator illuminates to indi-cate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off thesystem, the VDC system still operates to preventone drive wheel from slipping by transferringpower to a non slipping drive wheel. Theindicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDCfunctions are off and the indicator will notflash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to onwhen the ignition switch is placed in the offposition then back to the on position.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The VDC system is designed to help thedriver maintain stability but does notprevent accidents due to abrupt steer-ing operation at high speeds or by care-less or dangerous driving techniques.Reduce vehicle speed and be especiallycareful when driving and cornering onslippery surfaces and always drivecarefully.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM


● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,bushings and wheels are not NISSANrecommended for your vehicle or areextremely deteriorated, the VDC systemmay not operate properly. This couldadversely affect vehicle handling per-formance, and the indicator may

flash or both the and indi-cator lights may illuminate.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are extremelydeteriorated, the VDC system may notoperate properly and both theand the indicator lights mayilluminate.

● If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, both the andindicator lights may illuminate.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the VDC system may not operate prop-erly and the indicator may flash or

both the and indicatorlights may illuminate. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the indicator may flash or

both the and indicatorlights may illuminate. This is not a mal-function. Restart the engine after driv-ing onto a stable surface.

● If wheels or tires other than the NISSANrecommended ones are used, the VDCsystem may not operate properly andthe indicator may flash or both

the and indicator lights mayilluminate.

● The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if soequipped).

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.


ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not use your engine block heaterwith an ungrounded electrical systemor a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-riously injured by an electrical shock ifyou use an ungrounded connection.

● Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before startingthe engine. Damage to the cord couldresult in an electrical shock and cancause serious injury.

● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plugthe extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-VAC outlet. Failure to use theproper extension cord or a groundedoutlet can result in a fire or electricalshock and cause serious personalinjury.

Engine block heaters are available throughNISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperaturestarting. The engine block heater should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) orlower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine blockheater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into agrounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extensioncord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged infor at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outsidetemperatures, to properly warm the enginecoolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn theengine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-erly store the cord to keep it away frommoving parts.


MEMO


6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-13

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-sure of all tires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit, and the CHECKTIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is dis-played in the odometer, one or more of your tiresis significantly under-inflated. If equipped, thesystem also displays pressure of all tires (exceptthe spare tire) on the display screen by sending asignal from a sensor that is installed in eachwheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you ofit by the low tire pressure warning light. Thissystem will activate only when the vehicle isdriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Formore details, refer to “Warning/indicator lightsand audible reminders” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire pressure information” inthe “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voicerecognition systems” section and “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Move the shift selector to P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the automatic transmissionis shifted into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks �1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire�2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

1. Jack fastener2. Jack3. Jack toolsGetting the spare tire and tools

1. Open the back door.

2. Lift the handle on the floor and open thestorage area.

3. Remove the jack and jack tools.

● To remove the jack, rotate the jack fastenercounterclockwise.

WCE0044 LCE2000

In case of emergency 6-3

4. Find the oval-shaped opening above themiddle of the bumper. Pass the T-shapedend of the jack rod through the opening anddirect it toward the spare tire winch, locateddirectly above the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it isdesigned to be inserted at an angle asshown.

5. Fit the square end of the jack rod into thesquare hole of the wheel nut wrench to forma handle.

6. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod intothe T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Ap-ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged inthe spare tire winch and turn the jack rodcounterclockwise to lower the spare tire.

7. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,reach under the vehicle, remove the retainerchain, and carefully slide the tire from underthe rear of the vehicle. Do not remove therubber spacer.

LCE0106

LCE0107


8. To reinstall the wheel, insert the tire chainthrough the wheel. Be sure the rubberspacer is centered on the wheel before lift-ing. Use the assembled jack rod and slowlyrotate the winch clockwise to raise thewheel to the vehicle.

NOTE:

Inspect the spacer every six years and re-place as necessary. Contact your NISSANdealer for replacement parts if necessary.

CAUTION

● Be sure to center the spare tire sus-pending plate on the wheel and then liftthe spare tire.

● Failure to use the spacer may allow thechain to get stuck on the wheel nutholes.

Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

Always refer to the illustration for the correctplacement and jack-up points for your specificvehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

LCE2021


2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Thejack-up points are indicated by stamped ar-rows on the side of the frame.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jackas shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until thetire clears the ground.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove thetire.

WCE0139 LCE0087


Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve-hicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mi. (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tireand Loading Information label affixed tothe driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLDtire pressure, the display (if so equipped) ofthe tire pressure information may showhigher pressure than the COLD tire pres-sure after the vehicle has been driven morethan 1 mi. (1.6 km). This is because the tirepressure increases as the tire temperaturerises. This does not indicate a system mal-function.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-ment in the vehicle.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

WCE0063


● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep allsparks and flames away from thebattery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

JUMP STARTING


WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-lector to N (Neutral) (manual transmission)or to P (Park) (automatic transmission).

Switch off all unnecessary electrical sys-tems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-lustrated (�A , �B , �C , �D ).

CAUTION

● Always connect positive (�) to positive(�) and negative (�) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

WCE0054


WARNING

Do not push start this vehicle. The three-way catalyst may be damaged.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission models cannotbe push-started or tow-started. Attempt-ing to do so may cause transmissiondamage.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap while the engine is stillhot. When the radiator or coolant reser-voir cap is removed, pressurized hotwater will spurt out, possibly causingserious injury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading andthe illumination of the engine oil pressure/enginecoolant temperature high indicator light), or if youfeel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc. take the following steps.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift selectorto P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air conditionertemperature control to maximum hot and fancontrol to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS


6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSANdealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany of these conditions apply, dollies ora flatbed tow truck must be used.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSAN

Two-wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (rear) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive damage tothe transmission. If it is necessary totow the vehicle with the front wheelsraised always use towing dollies underthe rear wheels.

● When towing automatic transmissionmodels with the front wheels on theground or on towing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and secure the steeringwheel in a straight-ahead positionwith a rope or similar device. Neversecure the steering wheel by placingthe ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion. This may cause damage to thelock mechanism (for models with asteering lock mechanism).

If the speed or distance must necessarily begreater, remove the propeller shaft before towingto prevent damage to the transmission.

ACE1037


Four-wheel drive modelsNISSAN recommends that towing dollies beused when towing your vehicle or place the ve-hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models with any of thewheels on the ground as this may causeserious and expensive damage to thetransfer case and transmission.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

Pulling a stuck vehicle

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-sonal injury or death when recovering astuck vehicle:

● Contact a professional towing serviceto recover the vehicle if you have anyquestions regarding the recoveryprocedure.

● Attach recovery devices only to mainstructural members of the vehicle or therecovery hooks.

WCE0162 LCE0083


● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to towor free a stuck vehicle.

● Only use devices specifically designedfor vehicle recovery and follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

● Always pull the recovery device straightout from the front of the vehicle. Neverpull at an angle.

● Route recovery devices so they do nottouch any part of the vehicle except theattachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow themanufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-vice.

Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing orvehicle recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System(VDC).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and D (Drive).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R and D.

● Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.


7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not use car washes that use acid inthe detergent. Some car washes, espe-cially brushless ones, use some acid forcleaning. The acid may react with someplastic vehicle components, causingthem to crack. This could affect theirappearance, and also could cause themnot to function properly. Always checkwith your car wash to confirm that acidis not used.

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-ened in a mild soap solution, especially duringwinter months in areas where road salt is used. Ifnot removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:

● Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

● Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

● Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGSNISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it mayreact with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompound may come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily thanwith an oil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl andleather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-tectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This candamage the seat or occupant classifica-tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-tion of the air bag system and result inserious personal injury.

CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents or ammonia-based cleaners asthey may damage the leather’s naturalfinish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affectthe vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,take the following precautions:

● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-manent discoloration when they contact ve-hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-ener in a location that allows it to hang freeand not contact an interior surface.

● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip onthe vents. These products can cause imme-diate damage and discoloration whenspilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-structions before using the air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference thatmay result in a collision or injury:

● NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-other floor mat in the driver frontposition.

● Use only genuine NISSAN floor matsspecifically designed for use in your ve-hicle model. See your NISSAN dealerfor more information.

● Properly position the mats in the floor-well using the floor mat positioning aid.See �Floor mat positioning aid� in thissection.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-tained with regular cleaning and replaced if theybecome excessively worn.

CLEANING INTERIOR


Floor mat positioning aidThis vehicle includes two driver’s side front floormat brackets and one passenger’s side front floormat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place.Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been speciallydesigned for your vehicle model. The driver’s sidefloor mat has two grommet holes incorporated init and the passenger’s side has one grommethole. Position each mat by placing the floor matbracket hook through the floor mat grommetholes while centering the mat in the floorwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

LAI0009

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5

TemperatureHigh temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.


8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Keyfob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 8-31

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44

Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-mum maintenance requirements with long ser-vice intervals to save you both time and money.However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’sgood mechanical condition, as well as its emis-sions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide”. You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “ * ” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checkingthe tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten ifnecessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components Replace the TPMStransmitter grommet seal, valve core and capwhen the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) positionmechanism On a fairly steep hill check that yourvehicle is held securely with the shift selector inthe P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or thevehicle seems to take longer to stop, see aNISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mataway from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely heldon a fairly steep hill with only the parking brakeapplied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraints andheadrests move up and down smoothly and thelocks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latchedpositions.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake fluid level* Make sure that the brake fluidlevel is between the MIN and MAX lines on thereservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold, with the engineoff. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.


When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. Move the shift selector toP (Park).

● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFFor LOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may comeon at any time without warning, even ifthe ignition switch is in the OFF posi-tion and the engine is not running. Toavoid injury, always disconnect thenegative battery cable before workingnear the fan.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models, the fuelfilter or fuel lines should be serviced bya NISSAN dealer because the fuel linesare under high pressure even when theengine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

● Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS


VQ40DE engine

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir2. Fuse/fusible link box3. Fuse and relay box4. Engine oil filler cap5. Engine oil dipstick6. Brake fluid reservoir7. Air cleaner8. Drive belt location9. Radiator cap10. Power steering fluid reservoir11. Battery12. Engine coolant reservoir

WDI0633

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


VK56DE engine

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir2. Fuse/fusible link box3. Engine oil dipstick4. Engine oil filler cap5. Brake fluid reservoir6. Air cleaner7. Drive belt location8. Radiator cap9. Power steering fluid reservoir10. Fuse and relay box11. Battery12. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0627


The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith a pre-diluted mixture of 50% GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze andcoolant protection. The antifreeze solution con-tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en-gine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

● Never use any cooling system additivessuch as radiator sealer. Additives mayclog the cooling system and causedamage to the engine, transmissionand/or cooling system.

● When adding or replacing coolant, besure to use only Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-dilutedto provide antifreeze protection to -34°F (-37° C). If additional freeze protec-tion is needed due to weather whereyou operate your vehicle, add GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant(blue) concentrate following the direc-tions on the container. If an equivalentcoolant other than Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) isused, follow the coolant manufacturer’sinstructions to maintain minimum anti-freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). Theuse of other types of coolant solutionsother than Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalentmay damage the engine coolingsystem.

● The life expectancy of the factory-fillcoolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-ant other than Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-ing Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green), or the useof non-distilled water will reduce thelife expectancy of the factory-fill cool-ant. Refer to the Nissan Service andMaintenance Guide for more details.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM


CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If thereservoir is empty, check the coolant level in theradiator when the engine is cold. If there isinsufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening and also addit to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy ofthe factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or

the use of non-distilled water will reduce the lifeexpectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to theNISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide formore details.

The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur-ized tank. When installing the cap, tighten.

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

LDI0436


CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks �B . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark �A , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill �C .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

VQ40DE engineLDI0437

VK56DE engineLDI0628 LDI0371

ENGINE OIL


CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler �A cap by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug�B .

VQ40DE engineWDI0500

VK56DE engineWDI0504


5. Remove the drain plug �B with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” later in this section.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter.

4. Unscrew the plate covering the oil filter ex-posing the filter.

5. Loosen the oil filter �A with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise. Thenremove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

VQ40DEWDI0502


CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface witha clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the sealing surface of theengine. Failure to do so could lead toengine damage.

7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

9. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

When checking or replacement is required, werecommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

● Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. IfGenuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is notavailable, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATFmay also be used.

● Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine NISSAN Matic SATF or Matic J ATF will cause deteriora-tion in driveability and automatic trans-mission durability, and may damage theautomatic transmission, which is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is alsodescribed on caution labels located in the enginecompartment.

VK56DEWDI0505

5-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID


The fluid level should be checked using the HOTMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on thepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAXdepending on system fluid temperature. Removethe cap and fill through the opening.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.

● Recommended fluid is GenuineNISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake fluid specification information,refer to “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

WARNING

● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake system.The use of improper fluids can damagethe brake system and affect the vehi-cle’s stopping ability.

● Clean the filler cap before removing.

● Brake fluid is poisonous and should bestored carefully in marked containersout of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

WDI0256

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID


BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid level is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add Genuine NISSANSuper Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the lowwindshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, liftthe cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

VQ40DELDI0440

VK56DELDI0374 LDI0441

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID


Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount ofwindshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for windshield-washer fluid.This may result in damage to the paint.



● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Clean the battery with a solution of bakingsoda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames, anelectrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-gen gas generated by the battery is ex-plosive. Explosive gases can causeblindness or injury. Do not allow batteryfluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabricsor painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid cancause blindness or injury. After touch-ing a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● Do not tip the battery. Keep the ventcaps tight and the battery level.

BATTERY


1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver asshown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstallthe vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0224

WDI0529


CAUTION

● Do not ground accessories directly tothe battery terminal. Doing so will by-pass the variable voltage control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely.

● Use electrical accessories with the en-gine running to avoid discharging thevehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltagecontrol system. This system measures theamount of electrical discharge from the batteryand controls voltage generated by the generator.

The current sensor �A is located near the batteryalong the negative battery cable. If you add elec-trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure toground them to a suitable body ground such asthe frame or engine block area.

1. Power steering fluid pump2. Automatic belt tensioner3. Idler pulley4. Cooling fan5. Air conditioner compressor6. Crankshaft pulley7. Generator

LDI0454VQ40DE

WDI0674

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROLSYSTEM

DRIVE BELT


1. Power steering fluid pump2. Drive belt automatic belt tensioner3. Water pump pulley4. Cooling fan pulley5. Air conditioner compressor6. Crankshaft pulley7. Generator pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF orLOCK position before servicing drive belt.The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusualwear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt isin poor condition or is loose, have it replacedor adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs (if soequipped)

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped �Aspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceplatinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-gapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

VK56DEWDI0675 SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS


WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer for assistance.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs (if soequipped)

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped �Aspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceiridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-ping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer for assistance.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenancelog shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-nance Guide.”

To remove the air cleaner filter:

�1 Unlatch the clips and move the air cleanercover upward.

2. Remove the air cleaner filter.

3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous-ing and the cover with a damp cloth.

WDI0712

AIR CLEANER


NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, makesure the air cleaner cover is seated in thehousing and latch the clips.

WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTERThe in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the following proce-dure:

1. Open the glove box and press in on thesides so that it will open completely allowingit to hang by the cord.

LDI0442


2. Gently lift up on the tab �1 .

3. Pull the filter cover toward you and thendown �2 .

4. Remove the old filters �3 .

NOTE:

The filters are marked with air flow arrows.The end of the filter with the arrow shouldface the rear of the vehicle. The arrowsshould face downward.

5. Insert the first new filter into the housing andslide it over to the right. Insert the secondnew filter into the housing.

6. Replace the filter cover. The cover will clickinto place under the tab.

7. Install the glove box door.

CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washersolution or a mild detergent. Your windshield isclean if beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer solution or a mild detergent. Thenrinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-shield is still not clear after cleaning the bladesand using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

LDI2047

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES


REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

�2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

�3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in thegroove.

6. Return the wiper to its original position andrelease it until it has made contact with thewindshield.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful notto let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle�A . This may cause clogging or improper wind-shield washer operation. If wax gets into thenozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin �B .

WDI0408 WDI0595


Rear window wiper blade

�1 Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win-dow.

�2 Rotate the blade until it becomes free.

�3 Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm andsnap into place.

WDI0292


If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

Two types of fuses are used. Type �A is used inthe fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type�B is used in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. Theyare stored in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-partment and passenger compartment fuseboxes.

LDI0455

BRAKES FUSES


If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,the type A fuse will not be level with the fusepocket as shown in the illustration. This will notaffect the performance of the fuse. Make sure thefuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in theunderhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

LDI0457 LDI0444


5. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with a newfuse �B .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not operate andfuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks. If any of these fusible links are melted,replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with anequivalent good fuse �B .

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

WDI0452 LDI0445Type A

WDI0452


Extended storage switchIf any electrical equipment does not operate,remove the extended storage switch and checkfor an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used forlong term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-tended storage switch is broken it is notnecessary to replace it. Replace only theopen fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

How to replace the extended storage switch:

1. To remove the extended storage switch, besure the ignition switch is in the OFF orLOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFFposition.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs �1 found on eachside of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out from thefuse box �2 .

Type BLDI0456 LDI2035


CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallowthe battery or removed parts.

KEYFOB (if so equipped)

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

�1 Open the lid using a coin �A .

�2 Remove the battery �B .

�3 Install a new battery �C with the “+” facingdown.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding thebattery across the contact points will seri-ously deplete the storage capacity.

LDI2026

BATTERY REPLACEMENT


● Do not touch the internal circuit and electricterminals as it could cause a malfunction.

● When changing the battery, do not let dustor oil get on the keyfob.

● There is danger of explosion if a lithium bat-tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace onlywith the same or equivalent type.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

�4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then thebutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:

For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation. Note: Changesor modifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

For Canada:This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

SDI1867


NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if soequipped)Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver �A into the slit �Bof the corner and twist it to separate theupper part from the lower part. Use a cloth toprotect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-lent.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-tric terminals as doing so could cause amalfunction.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holdingthe battery across the contact points willseriously deplete the storage capacity.

● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-tom of the case.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated �C �D .

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance forreplacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation. Note: Changesor modifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

For Canada:This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

WDI0535


HEADLIGHTS

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Abulb can be replaced from inside the enginecompartment without removing the headlight as-sembly.

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BAREHANDS.

● Use the same number and wattage asshown in the chart.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the head-light reflector for a long period of timeas dust, moisture and smoke may enterthe headlight body and affect the per-formance of the headlight.

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of theexterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. Atemperature difference between the inside andthe outside of the lens causes the fog. This is nota malfunction. If large drops of water collectinside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Removing the headlight bulb1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector from therear end of the bulb.

LDI0446

LIGHTS


4. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclock-wise until it is free from the headlight reflec-tor and then remove it �A .

5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Do notshake or rotate the bulb when removing it�B .

Replacing the headlight bulb1. Insert the bulb.

DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BAREHANDS.

2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer.

● Be sure the lip of the bulb socket con-tacts the headlight body.

3. Push the electrical connector into the bulbplastic base until it snaps and stops.

4. Connect the negative (-) battery cable.

5. Close the hood.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*1

Headlight 65/55 9007 (HB5)Turn signal light/Parking light 28/8 T-20 NASide marker 3.8 194Rear combination light

Turn signal 27 3156AKStop/Tail 27/8 3157KX RDBack-up 18 921

License plate light*2 5 W5WFog light (if so equipped)*2 55 H11Personal lights*2 8 AL38Map lights 8 AL38Cargo light 8 AL89High-mounted stop light*2 — LED

*1Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.*2The bulb is not serviceable in-vehicle. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.


1. Map lights (if so equipped)2. Personal lights (if so equipped)3. Cargo light4. High-mount stoplight5. License plate light6. Rear combination light7. Headlight assembly8. Fog light (if so equipped)

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

: Indicates bulb removal: Indicates bulb installation

LDI0450 WDI0295


Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing.

Map lightsLDI0459

Cargo lightWDI0206

Rear combination lightLDI0448


If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the“In case of emergency” section of thismanual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit and the CHECK TIREPRES (pressure) warning message is dis-played in the odometer, one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated. Ifequipped, the system also displays pres-sure of all tires (except the spare tire) onthe display screen by sending a signalfrom a sensor that is installed in eachwheel.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire pressure informa-tion” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phoneand voice recognition systems” section,“Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification labelor the Tire and Loading Information labelunder the “Recommended Cold Tire Infla-tion Pressure” heading. This label is af-fixed to the driver side center pillar. Tirepressures should be checked regularlybecause:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WHEELS AND TIRES


WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label. The vehicle weight ca-pacity is indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label. Donot load your vehicle beyond thiscapacity. Overloading your ve-hicle may result in reduced tirelife, unsafe operating conditionsdue to premature tire failure, orunfavorable handling character-istics and could also lead to aserious accident. Loading be-yond the specified capacity mayalso result in failure of other ve-hicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.


Tire and loading information label

�1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-ber of occupants that can be seatedin the vehicle.

�2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-mation in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section.

�3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

�4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set by themanufacturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicle’s GVWR.

�5 Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” laterin this section.

�6 Spare tire size.

LDI2007


Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire Placard (if soequipped) or the Tire and LoadingInformation label (if so equipped).

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-tion Pressure

Front Original Tire:P245/75R16P265/65R17P265/60R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Rear Original Tire:P245/75R16P265/65R17P265/60R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire:P245/75R16P265/65R17P265/60R18

240 kPa, 35 PSILDI0393


TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

�1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles (not alltires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimeters ofthe tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This numberis the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

ExampleWDI0394

ExampleWDI0395


7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

�2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-ment Of Transportation”. The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of the Tire IdentificationNumber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional).

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture.

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

ExampleWDI0396


�3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and others.

�4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

�5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

�6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

�7 The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

�8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward facing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.


Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tire size. Other typesmay damage your vehicle. Use chain tensionerswhen recommended by the tire chain manufac-turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of thetire chain must be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damage to thefenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, yourvehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handlingand performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving on clearpaved roads.


CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section in this manual for tire re-placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

WDI0258 WDI0259


● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact a NISSANdealer.


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, VDC system, ground clear-ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chainclearance, speedometer calibration,headlight aim and bumper height.Some of these effects may lead to acci-dents and could result in serious per-sonal injury.

● If your vehicle was originally equippedwith 4 tires that were the same size andyou are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,install the new tires on the rear axle.Placing new tires on the front axle maycause loss of vehicle control in somedriving conditions and cause an acci-dent and personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics, affectthe VDC system and/or interferencewith the brake discs/drums. Such inter-ference can lead to decreased brakingefficiency and/or early brake pad/shoewear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information”section of this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.




● Do not install a damaged or deformedwheel or tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tires could havestructural damage and could fail with-out warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted orradial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Failure to do so may result in acircumference difference between tireson the front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and may dam-age the transmission, transfer case anddifferential gears.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommendedthat all four tires be replaced with tires of thesame size, brand, construction and tread pattern.

The tire pressure and wheel alignment shouldalso be checked and corrected as necessary.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet.

Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.

Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a full sizespare that is a different size or brand than the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle. This full sizespare tire is intended for temporary use only andshould be replaced at the first opportunity.

Observe the following precautions if the full sizetemporary use only spare tire must be used.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orinvolved in an accident:

WARNING

● The spare tire should be used for emer-gency use only. It should be replacedwith the standard tire at the first oppor-tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-tial damage.


● Drive carefully while the spare tire isinstalled. Avoid sharp turns and abruptbraking while driving. The vehicle driv-ing performance may be affected whendriving on wet or snow covered roads.

● When the temporary full size spare isinstalled, the following systems maynot work correctly:

– Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS).

– Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)System.

● Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure. Always keep the spare tireinflated to the pressure specificationshown on the tire and loading informa-tion label.

● With the spare tire installed do not drivethe vehicle at speeds faster than 50MPH (80 km/h).

● When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the temporary spare tireshould be used on the front wheels andthe original tire used on the rearwheels. Use tire chains only on the drivewheels.

● Do not use the spare tire on othervehicles.

● Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.

CAUTION

● Do not use tire chains on a spare tire.Tire chains will not fit properly and maycause damage to the vehicle.


MEMO


9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . 9-10Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-30Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-31

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 21-1/8 gal 17-5/8 gal 80 See “Fuel Recommendation” later in this section.

Engine oil *7 • Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1• Viscosity SAE 5W-30

Drain and RefillWith oil filter change VQ40DE 5-3/8 qt 4-1/2 qt 5.1

VK56DE 6-7/8 qt 5-3/4 qt 6.5

Without oil filterchange

VQ40DE 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 4.8

VK56DE 6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt 6.2

Cooling systemWith reservoir models w/o rear a/c 2-3/4 gal 2-1/4 gal 10.2 Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalentWith reservoir models with rear a/c 3-1/2 gal 3 gal 13.4

Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instruc-tions in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF *2

Power steering fluid (PSF) Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*3

Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *4 or equivalentDOT 3

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *5

Air conditioning system oil — — — Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *5

Transfer fluidAll mode 4WD 3-1/8 qt 2-5/8 qt 3.0 Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended *6

Part time 4WD 2-1/8 qt 1-3/4 qt 2.0

Front final drive oilVQ40DE 1-3/4 pt 1-1/2 pt 0.85 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or

API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90 *8VK56DE 3-3/8 pt 2-7/8 pt 1.6

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Rear final drive oilVQ40DE 3 pt 2-1/2 pt 1.4 API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-90 *9

VK56DE 3-3/4 pt 3-1/8 pt 1.75

Windshield-washer fluid (sharedbetween front and rear wipers)

1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze fluid or equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.*2: If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or

Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by theNISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

*3: DEXRON™ VI type ATF may also be used.*4: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.*5: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label” in this section.*6: Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability, and may damage the transfer, which is not covered by the NISSAN

new vehicle limited warranty.*7: For further details, see “Changing engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.*8: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0° C (32° F).*9: See a NISSAN dealer for service, for synthetic oil.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONNISSAN recommends the use of premium un-leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Researchoctane number 96). If unleaded premium gaso-line is not available, you may use unleaded regulargasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKInumber (Research octane number 91), but youmay notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-cations where it is available. Many of the automo-bile manufacturers developed this specificationto improve emission control system and vehicleperformance. Ask your service station manager ifthe gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanolwith or without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels ofwhich the oxygenate content and the fuel com-patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-termined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.


Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

E–85 fuelE-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuelethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 canonly be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Donot use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. governmentregulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbreviation orthe appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on levelroads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehiclenot specifically designed for E-85 fuelcan damage fuel system componentsand is not covered by the NISSAN newvehicle limited warranty.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleadedgasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.


ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, qualityand viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. See “Capacitiesand recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in thissection. NISSAN recommends the use of anenergy conserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-tion mark on the front of the container. Oils whichdo not have the specified quality label should notbe used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oilviscosity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals.”

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-ranty.

WTI0183


Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/Csystem oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.


ENGINE

Model VQ40DE VK56DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHCCylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60° 8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)Displacement cu in (cm3) 241.30 (3,954) 338.78 (5,552)Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6 1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2

Idle speedA/T (in “N” position) No adjustment is necessary.Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idlespeed)CO % at idle

Spark plug DILFR5A–11 DILFR5A–11Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS


WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

16 x 7.0J

17 x 7.5J

18 x 7.5JJ

Tires

P245/75R16

P265/65R17

P265/60R18

Spare tire Full size

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 192.3 (4,884)Overall width in (mm) 72.8 (1,850)Overall height (withroof rack and stan-dard tires)

4x2 in (mm) VQ40DE - S 72.0 (1,829)VQ40DE - SV/Silver/LE(V6)

72.2 (1,834)

4x4 in (mm) VQ40DE - S 72.6 (1,845)VQ40DE - SV/Silver/LE(V6)

72.6 (1,843)

VK56DE - S/LE (V8) 72.7 (1,846)Front Track in (mm) 61.8 (1,570)Rear Track in (mm) 61.8 (1,570)

Wheelbase in (mm) 112.2 (2,850)

Gross vehicle weightrating lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.

V.S.S. certification label”on the center pillar be-tween the driver’s side

front and rear doors.

Gross axle weightrating

Front lb (kg)Rear lb (kg)


When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

LTI0085 LTI0086

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Reviewit carefully.

VQ40DE engineLTI0127

VK56DE engineWTI0095 WTI0099


EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed tothe underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0173 WTI0100 WTI0167


Use the following step to mount the front licenseplate:

● Attach the license plate bracket on the plas-tic finisher at the location mark (smalldimple) using the two 6 mm screws pro-vided.

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optionalequipment. This information is lo-cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

LTI0137

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION


● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combinedweight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label.

● Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.Both the GVWR and GAWR are locatedon the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. See “Measurement of weights” laterin this section.

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not exceedthe number of occupants shown as“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo”, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown in the follow-ing illustration.


Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

ExampleLTI0152


5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurement of weights” later inthis section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label.

SECURING THE LOADThere are tie down hooks located in the cargoarea as shown. The tie down hooks can be usedto secure cargo with ropes or other types ofstraps.

Do not apply a total load of more than 55lbs. (245 N) to a single �A plastic hook or 44lbs. (196 N) to a single �B plastic hookwhen securing cargo.

Do not apply a total load of more than 110lbs. (490 N) to a single metal floor tie-downhook when securing cargo.

WARNING


● The child restraint top tether strap maybe damaged by contact with items inthe cargo area. Secure any items in thecargo area. Your child could be seri-ously injured or killed in a collision ifthe top tether strap is damaged.

Cargo area ceiling tie-down hooksWTI0125

Cargo area floor tie-down hooksLTI0126


● Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximum frontand rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of yourvehicle can break, tire damage couldoccur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could result inloss of control and cause personalinjury.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could oc-cur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’swarranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.


WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is availableon the website at www.nissanusa.com. Thisguide includes information on trailer towing ca-pability and the special equipment required forproper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart found later in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR) should not exceed the value specifiedin the following “Towing Load/Specification”chart. The GCWR equals the combined weight of the

towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greaterthan these or using improper towing equipmentcould adversely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced for low traction situations (for example,on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0162

TOWING A TRAILER


Temperature conditions can also affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outsidetemperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating. The engineprotection mode, which helps reduce the chanceof engine damage, could activate and automati-cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed maydecrease under high load. Plan your trip carefullyto account for trailer and vehicle load, weatherand road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-ing speed, pull to the side of the road in asafe area. Allow the engine to cool andreturn to normal operation. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures is not covered byNISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadWhen using a weight carrying or a weight distrib-uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 -15 percent of the total trailer load or use thetrailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu-facturer. The tongue load must be within themaximum tongue load limits shown in the follow-ing “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If thetongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargoto allow for proper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. The GVW equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment. In addition, front or rear GAW mustnot exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

WTI0160 ATI1025


Towing capacities are calculated assuming abase vehicle with driver and any options requiredto achieve the rating. Additional passengers,cargo and/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle andreduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacityand trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed toconfirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, FrontGAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measuredusing platform type scales commonly found attruck stops, highway weigh stations, buildingsupply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity fortongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all ofthe passengers and cargo that are normallyin the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum tongue load.

To determine the available towing capacity, usethe following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the�Towing Load/Specification� chart foundlater in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weighyour trailer on a scale with all equipment andcargo, that are normally in the trailer when it istowed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is notmore than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shownon the trailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale tomake sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and RearGross Axle Weight are not more than FrontGross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weighton the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the specified rat-ings.

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargo andhitch - 5,425 lb. (2,460 kg).

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -6,000 lb. (2,722 kg).

● Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)from “Towing Load/Specification� chart -11,133 lb. (5,050 kg).

● Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-ing Load/Specification� chart - 6,000 lb.(2,722 kg).

6,000 lb. (2,722 kg) GVWR

– 5,425 lb. (2,460 kg) GVW

= 575 lb. (260 kg) Available for tongueweight

11,133 lb. (5,050 kg) GCWR

– 5,425 lb. (2,460 kg) GVW

= 5,708 lb. (2,588 kg) Capacity available fortowing

575 lb. (260 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 5,708 lb. (2,588 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less thanthe maximum towing capacity due to the passen-ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the


trailer tongue load specification recommendedby the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue loadbecomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed themaximum tongue weight specification shown inthe “Towing load/specification” chart even if thecalculated available tongue weight is greaterthan 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is lessthan 10% , reduce the total trailer weight tomatch the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are withinthe required ratings.

Trailer frontal area

CAUTION

Exceeding the maximum trailer frontalarea specification may exceed the towingcapacity of the vehicle. This may affect thetowing performance and lead to vehicledamage.

The trailer frontal area affects the towing load of atrailer. The frontal area is the total area of thevehicle and trailer that is affected by air resis-tance while towing. Do not exceed the maximumtrailer frontal area specification shown in the�Towing Load/Specification” chart. The frontalarea can be determined by multiplying the widthof the trailer by the height of the trailer. For

example, a trailer that is 8 feet wide by 6 feet tallhas a trailer frontal area of 48 square feet.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

US & CAN

V6 V8

Maximum Tow-ing Capacity*1,

*2

6,000 lb.(2,722 kg)

7,000 lb.(3,175 kg)

MaximumTongue Load

600 lb.(272 kg)

700 lb.(318 kg)

MaximumGross Com-bined Weight

Rating

11,135 lb.(5,050 kg)

12,569 lb.(5,700 kg)

Maximum trailerfrontal area

60 sq ft (5.52 sq meters)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculatedassuming a base vehicle with driver and anyoptions required to achieve the rating. Additionalpassengers, cargo and/or optional equipmentwill add weight to the vehicle and reduce yourvehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

*2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system isrecommended when towing over 5,000 lbs(2,268 kg).

TOWING SAFETYTrailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optionaltrailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Thishitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity ofthis vehicle when the proper towing equipment isused. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ballthat is rated for the trailer to be towed. GenuineNISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are availablefrom your NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optionaltrailer tow package, check the towing capacity ofyour receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Choosea proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. Agenuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available fromyour NISSAN dealer. Make sure the trailer hitch issecurely attached to the vehicle to help avoidpersonal injury or property damage due to swaycaused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces orpassing trucks.


WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be capableof towing a trailer heavier than the weightrating of the hitch components. Never ex-ceed the weight rating of the hitch compo-nents. Doing so can cause serious personalinjury or property damage.

Hitch ballChoose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to the ballmount. There should be at least 2 threadsshowing beyond the lock washer and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount andthe ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.Choose a proper class ball mount based on thetrailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount shouldbe chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with theground.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount isone that is designed to carry the whole amount oftongue weight and gross weight directly on theball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling”or“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ballmount and to the trailer to distribute the tongueweight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many ve-hicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a giventrailer, and need some of the tongue weighttransferred through the frame and pushing downon the front wheels. This gives stability to the towvehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) isrecommended if you plan to tow trailers with amaximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) .Check with the trailer and towing equipment

manufacturers to determine if they recommendthe use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may af-fect the operation of trailer surge brakes. Ifyou are considering use of a weight-distributing hitch system with a surgebrake-equipped trailer, check with thesurge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturerto determine if and how this can be done.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-turer for installing and using the weight-distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.With the ignition on and the doors closed,allow the vehicle to stand for several minutesso that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point onthe front and rear bumpers at the center ofthe vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjustthe hitch equalizers so that the front bumperheight is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) ofthe reference height measured in step 2. Therear bumper should be no higher than thereference height measured in step 2.


WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributinghitch so the rear of the bumper is nohigher than the measured referenceheight when the trailer is attached. If therear bumper is higher than the measuredreference height when loaded, the vehiclemay handle unpredictably which couldcause a loss of vehicle control and causeserious personal injury or propertydamage.

Sway control deviceSudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffetingcaused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-dling. Sway control devices may be used to helpcontrol these affects. If you choose to use one,contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to makesure the sway control device will work with thevehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-tem. Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using the swaycontrol device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,587 kg).

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg).

Class IV hitch

Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,535 kg). Aweight distributing hitch should be used to towtrailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,268 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IVtrailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb(4,535 kg) maximum weight rating, but your ve-hicle is only capable of towing the maximumtrailer weights shown in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart earlier in this section.

CAUTION

● Special hitches which include frame re-inforcements are required for towingabove 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genu-ine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts andhitch balls for pickup trucks and sportutility vehicles are available at aNISSAN dealer.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thereceiver when not in use.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.


Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure shouldbe in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights whileusing the vehicle tail light, stoplight andturn signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethat 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using a module/converterthat exceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-tain the proper equipment and to have itinstalled.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with thetrailer tow package are equipped with a 4-pintrailer harness connector. If your trailer isequipped with a 7-pin connector, an adapter willbe needed to connect the trailer lights to thevehicle. Adapters are available at NISSAN deal-ers as well as auto parts stores and hitch retail-ers.

Trailer brakes

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used. However, most statesrequire a separate braking system on trailers witha loaded weight above a specific amount. Makesure the trailer meets the local regulations andthe regulations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems are available.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator ismounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic linerunning to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes areactivated by the trailer pushing against the hitchball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulicsurge brakes are common on rental trailers andsome boat trailers. In this type of system, there isno hydraulic or electric connection for brake op-eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer.

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking sys-tems are activated by an electronic signal sentfrom a trailer brake controller (special brake-sensing module). If electric trailer brakes areused, see “Electric trailer brake controller” in thissection.

Have a professional supplier of towing equip-ment make sure the trailer brakes are properlyinstalled and demonstrate proper brake functiontesting.


WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Electric trailer brake controller

Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re-quire the installation of an aftermarket trailerbrake controller.

A Genuine NISSAN jumper harness is availablethat is specifically designed to be used wheninstalling an aftermarket brake controller.

Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake con-troller according to the manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible inthe trailer to keep the trailer center of gravitylow.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half. Also make sure the load isbalanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicleand trailer so the required clearance isknown.

Trailer towing tipsIn order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin orlock to prevent the coupler from inadver-tently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want thetrailer to go. Make small corrections andback up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope is notrecommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhillside of the vehicle and trailer wheels.


3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowlyrelease the brake pedal until the blocks ab-sorb the vehicle load.


5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if soequipped) indicates the transfer case is in4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. Ifthe indicator light is flashing, or theATP light is ON, make sure the transmissionis in P (Park) (A/T) and turn the 4WD switchto 2WD or 4H. See “Automatic transmissionpark warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section and “Using four wheeldrive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving”section.

7. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer areclear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● While going downhill, the weight of thetrailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-tain adequate control, reduce your speedand shift to a lower gear. Avoid long orrepeated use of the brakes when descend-ing a hill, as this reduces their effectivenessand could cause overheating. Shifting to alower gear instead provides “engine brak-ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-quently.

● If the engine coolant temperature rises to ahigh temperature, refer to “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emergency”section of this owner’s manual.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal toallow the vehicle to coast and steer asstraight ahead as the road conditions allow.This combination will help stabilize the ve-hicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering orapplying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply thebrakes and pull to the side of the road in asafe area.


3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-anced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-mission to a lower gear for engine brakingwhen driving down steep or long hills. Thiswill help slow the vehicle without applyingthe brakes.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

● NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-trol not be used while towing a trailer.

● Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for vehicles thatare towing trailers. Obey the local speedlimits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe orrear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lightsbefore backing the trailer into the water orthe trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWINGTowing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-sion vehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission partsdue to lack of transmission lubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Automatic TransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with an automatictransmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUSTbe placed under the towed vehicle’s drivewheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’srecommendations when using their product.


DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING


Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with othervehicle warranties in your Warranty InformationBooklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.If you did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with othervehicle warranties in your Warranty InformationBooklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.If you did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform Transport Canada in additionto notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints,it may open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-port Canada cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s De-fect Investigations and Recalls Divisiontoll free at 1-800-333-0510. You mayalso report safety defects online at:https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS


Additional information concerning motor ve-hicle safety may be obtained from TransportCanada’s Road Safety Information Centreat 1-800-333-0371 or online atwww.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concernsplease contact our Consumer InformationCentre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired orthe battery is disconnected, the vehicle may bereset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking theI/M test, check the vehicle’sinspection/maintenance test readiness condi-tion. Place the ignition switch in the ON positionwithout starting the engine. If the MalfunctionIndicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/Mtest condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does notblink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is“ready”. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the“ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle fortesting.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assist in understand-ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDRis designed to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in thisvehicle is designed to record such data as:

● How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

● Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

● How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

● How fast the vehicle was traveling.

● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded byyour vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and no personal data(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)


the type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-ment is required and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have the special equip-ment, can read the information if they have ac-cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will onlybe accessed with the consent of the vehicleowner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-mitted by law.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory-trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model yearand prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION


MEMO


10 Index4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

A

Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . .5-37Adjusting pedal position . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-61, 2-19Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-41Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-48Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38, 4-45Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-47Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-48

Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-23Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-14Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-36

Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48

Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-63Compact disc (CD) player . . . . .4-57, 4-71

Audio SystemCompactFlash (CF) player . . . . . . . . .4-73

Audio systemFM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68

Audio SystemMusic Box� hard-disk drive audiosystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75

Audio systemRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-87

Audio SystemSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60, 4-68

Audio systemSteering wheel audio control switch . . .4-86

Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-32Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-47Automatic transmission positionindicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-14Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-18

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-29

Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66, 4-73

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Block heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Bluetooth� hands-free phonesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-105, 4-120Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-36Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-33Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-22, 8-25Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-20Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . .4-18, 4-34Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-14Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. .9-2Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . . .9-13Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-84CD changer (See audio system) . . . . . . . .4-63CD player (See audio system) . . . . . .4-57, 4-71Check tire press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Child restraints . . . . . . .1-26, 1-27, 1-28, 1-30

Precautions on child restraints . . .1-28, 1-35,1-39, 1-43Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-32

Child restraint with top tether strap. . . . . . .1-32Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56, 4-61, 4-69

(models with navigation system) . . .4-13, 4-29Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13, 4-29C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-11Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . .4-57, 4-71CompactFlash (CF) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-73Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18

Brightness/contrast button. . . . . .4-18, 4-34Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-18Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-27Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21Without navigation system . . . . . . . . . .4-4

ControlsAudio controls (steering wheel). . . . . . .4-86Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-38, 4-45

Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-87Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-47

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-9Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . . .1-58

D

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-31Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

Digital video disc DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-31Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-4,

4-18Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-22Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . .3-32Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-14Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-12Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-29Engine

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-13Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-12Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-9Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-16Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-18Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

10-2

F

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . .2-33Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . .8-15

F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-11Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-53Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . .2-5, 3-25

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-7Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glass hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

H

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth� . . . .4-105,4-120

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-33Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-28Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Headphones (See NISSAN mobileentertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-38, 4-45Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-39, 4-46

Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-47HomeLink� Universal Transceiver. . . . . . . .2-51Hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Hook

Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-4, 5-13Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-11In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . . .3-29Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-31Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-31Intelligent Key system

Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Remote keyless entry operation. . . . . . .3-17Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30

10-3

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system(See Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . .3-17

Keyless entry system(See remote keyless entry system). . . . . . . .3-7

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-11Emission control information label . . . . .9-12Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-11Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-12Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. .9-10Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-60

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . . .9-13Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-61, 2-19Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-33Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-14

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-28Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-17Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-55Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 3-25Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-17Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-18Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-13Luggage storage (see vehicle loadinginformation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42

M

MaintenanceChanging the maintenance interval . .4-9, 4-25

Displaying the maintenance noticereminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10, 4-26General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Resetting the maintenanceinterval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10, 4-25Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-26Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-25Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-31Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-29Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Music Box� hard-disk drive audio system . . .4-75

N

NISSAN Intelligent Key™. . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-11NISSAN mobile entertainment system(MES). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-4, 5-13NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . .4-131

10-4

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-5Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-12Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Pedal position adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Phone, Bluetooth� hands-free system . . . .4-105,

4-120Power

Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . .1-28, 1-35, 1-39, 1-43Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-19Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . . . .1-59Programmable features. . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-27Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-104Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . . .4-63FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-87Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-86

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30

Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-87Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Rear window wiper and washer switches . . .2-27Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Registering your vehicle in another country . .9-10Remote controller (See NISSAN mobileentertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91Remote keyless entry system. . . . . . . . . . .3-7Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-29Resetting the fuel economy . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-23

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7Child seat belts . . . . .1-28, 1-35, 1-39, 1-43Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-29

Screen (See NISSAN mobile entertainmentsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-4Second row bench seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Seat belt

Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-27Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27

10-5

Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-19Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . .1-59Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-26Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-25Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-22

Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Seats

Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Automatic drive positioner. . . . . . . . . .3-32Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-2

Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem), engine start . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-4, 5-13Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-27Shifting

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-25Side air bag system (See supplemental side airbag, curtain and rollover air bag systems) . . .1-58Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60Starting

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-13Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21Steering

Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . . .4-86Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 2-42Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-60Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-61, 2-19Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-53Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-60Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-46Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-47Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-28Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-4, 5-13Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 8-46Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-12Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-28Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-17

Tire pressure display . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-23Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3

10-6

Tire rotation maintenance reminder . . . .4-8, 4-23Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-32Towing

2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-124-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-21Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

TransceiverHomeLink� Universal Transceiver. . . . . .2-51

TransmissionDriving with automatic transmission . . . .5-14Shift selector lock release. . . . . . . . . .5-18

Travel (See registering your vehicle inanother country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

U

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-28

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-18Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-35Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-38Vehicle electronic system . . . . . . . .4-15, 4-30Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. . . .9-10Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-13Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13, 6-14Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Vehicle security system(NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-4, 5-13Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . .4-131Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

W

Warning4WD warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-61, 2-19Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-14Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-16Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-16Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-17Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-55Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-60

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . .9-9Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9When traveling or registering your vehiclein another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-47Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-26Wiper

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

10-7

RECOMMENDED FUEL:NISSAN recommends the use of premium un-leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Researchoctane number 96). If unleaded premium gaso-line is not available, you may use unleaded regu-lar gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87AKI number (Research octane number 91), butyou may notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● Engine oil with API Certification Mark

● Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:See Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver sidecenter pillar or on the driver’s door. For additionalinformation, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“Break-in schedule” information found in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-low these recommendations for the future reli-ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

®

2012 PATHFINDEROWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2012 N

ISS

AN

PA

TH

FIN

DE

RR

51

-D

R51-D

Printing : August 2011 (18)

Publication No.: OM1E 0R51U0

Printed in U.S.A.

OM2E 0R51U0

2012 pathfinder owner's manual

Automotive